You are on page 1of 140

Contents

Safety Information and Introduction ............2


AV RECEIVER

TX-NR626 Table of Contents ...........................................6

Connections .................................................12

Turning On & Basic Operations..................21

Instruction Manual Playback........................................................29

Advanced Operations ..................................48

Controlling Other Components...................71

Appendix .......................................................77

Internet Radio Guide

Remote Control Codes

En
Safety Information and Introduction
9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized B. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen
or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two into the apparatus,
WARNING: blades with one wider than the other. A grounding C. If the apparatus has been exposed to rain or
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC type plug has two blades and a third grounding water,
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN prong. The wide blade or the third prong are D. If the apparatus does not operate normally by
OR MOISTURE.
provided for your safety. If the provided plug does following the operating instructions. Adjust
not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for only those controls that are covered by the
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
replacement of the obsolete outlet. operating instructions as an improper
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE 10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or adjustment of other controls may result in
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED pinched particularly at plugs, convenience damage and will often require extensive work
SERVICE PERSONNEL. receptacles, and the point where they exit from by a qualified technician to restore the
the apparatus. apparatus to its normal operation,
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by E. If the apparatus has been dropped or
WARNING AVIS
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE the manufacturer. damaged in any way, and
DO NOT OPEN NE PAS OUVRIR
12. Use only with the cart, PORTABLE CART WARNING F. When the apparatus exhibits a distinct change
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within stand, tripod, bracket, or in performance this indicates a need for
an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the table specified by the service.
user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous manufacturer, or sold with 16. Object and Liquid Entry
voltage within the products enclosure that may
be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of
the apparatus. When a cart Never push objects of any kind into the apparatus
electric shock to persons. is used, use caution when through openings as they may touch dangerous
The exclamation point within an equilateral
moving the cart/apparatus voltage points or short-out parts that could result
S3125A
triangle is intended to alert the user to the combination to avoid injury in a fire or electric shock.
presence of important operating and from tip-over. The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the 13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or splashing and no objects filled with liquids, such
literature accompanying the appliance. when unused for long periods of time. as vases shall be placed on the apparatus.
14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Dont put candles or other burning objects on top
Servicing is required when the apparatus has of this unit.
been damaged in any way, such as power-supply 17. Batteries
Important Safety Instructions cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or Always consider the environmental issues and
1. Read these instructions. objects have fallen into the apparatus, the follow local regulations when disposing of
2. Keep these instructions. apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, batteries.
3. Heed all warnings. does not operate normally, or has been dropped. 18. If you install the apparatus in a built-in installation,
4. Follow all instructions. 15. Damage Requiring Service such as a bookcase or rack, ensure that there is
5. Do not use this apparatus near water. Unplug the apparatus from the wall outlet and adequate ventilation.
6. Clean only with dry cloth. refer servicing to qualified service personnel Leave 20 cm (8") of free space at the top and
7. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in under the following conditions: sides and 10 cm (4") at the rear. The rear edge of
accordance with the manufacturers instructions. A. When the power-supply cord or plug is the shelf or board above the apparatus shall be
8. Do not install near any heat sources such as damaged, set 10 cm (4") away from the rear panel or wall,
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other creating a flue-like gap for warm air to escape.
apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce
heat.

En-2
Safety Information and Introduction

Precautions extended period, remove the power cord from the


AC outlet.
interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
1. Recording CopyrightUnless its for personal 5. Preventing Hearing Loss frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
use only, recording copyrighted material is illegal Caution accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
without the permission of the copyright holder. Excessive sound pressure from earphones and interference to radio communications. However, there
2. AC FuseThe AC fuse inside the unit is not user- headphones can cause hearing loss. is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
serviceable. If you cannot turn on the unit, contact 6. Batteries and Heat Exposure particular installation. If this equipment does cause
your Onkyo dealer. Warning harmful interference to radio or television reception,
3. CareOccasionally you should dust the unit all Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall which can be determined by turning the equipment off
over with a soft cloth. For stubborn stains, use a not be exposed to excessive heat as sunshine, and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
soft cloth dampened with a weak solution of mild fire or the like. interference by one or more of the following
detergent and water. Dry the unit immediately 7. Never Touch this Unit with Wet HandsNever measures:
afterwards with a clean cloth. Dont use abrasive handle this unit or its power cord while your hands Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
cloths, thinners, alcohol, or other chemical are wet or damp. If water or any other liquid gets Increase the separation between the equipment
solvents, because they may damage the finish or inside this unit, have it checked by your Onkyo and receiver.
remove the panel lettering. dealer. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
4. Power 8. Handling Notes different from that to which the receiver is
WARNING If you need to transport this unit, use the original connected.
BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE packaging to pack it how it was when you Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SECTION originally bought it. technician for help.
CAREFULLY. Do not leave rubber or plastic items on this unit This device complies with Industry Canada licence-
AC outlet voltages vary from country to country. for a long time, because they may leave marks exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
Make sure that the voltage in your area meets the on the case. following two conditions: (1) this device may not
voltage requirements printed on the units rear This units top and rear panels may get warm cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
panel (e.g., AC 230 V, 50 Hz or AC 120 V, 60 Hz). after prolonged use. This is normal. any interference, including interference that may
The power cord plug is used to disconnect this If you do not use this unit for a long time, it may cause undesired operation of the device.
unit from the AC power source. Make sure that not work properly the next time you turn it on, so Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR dIndustrie
the plug is readily operable (easily accessible) at be sure to use it occasionally. Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
all times. licence. Lexploitation est autorise aux deux
For U.S. and Canadian models conditions suivantes : (1) lappareil ne doit pas
For models with [POWER] button, or with both
FCC CAUTION produire de brouillage, et (2) lutilisateur de lappareil
[POWER] and [ON/STANDBY] buttons:
Pressing the [POWER] button to select OFF Changes or modifications not expressly approved by doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi,
mode does not fully disconnect from the mains. If the party responsible for compliance could void the mme si le brouillage est susceptible den
you do not intend to use the unit for an extended users authority to operate the equipment. compromettre le fonctionnement.
period, remove the power cord from the AC outlet. Note: This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in
For models with [ON/STANDBY] button only: This equipment has been tested and found to comply conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Pressing the [ON/STANDBY] button to select with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Standby mode does not fully disconnect from the part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
mains. If you do not intend to use the unit for an to provide reasonable protection against harmful

En-3
Safety Information and Introduction

RF Exposure Compliance Modle pour les Canadien IMPORTANT


This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation REMARQUE: CET APPAREIL NUMRIQUE DE The plug is fitted with an appropriate fuse. If the fuse
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled LA CLASSE B EST CONFORME LA NORME needs to be replaced, the replacement fuse must
environment and meets the FCC radio frequency NMB-003 DU CANADA. approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362 and have the
(RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 Sur les modles dont la fiche est polarise: same ampere rating as that indicated on the plug.
and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) ATTENTION: POUR VITER LES CHOCS Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the
Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of LECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS body of the fuse.
RF energy that it deemed to comply without LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE If the power cords plug is not suitable for your socket
maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER outlets, cut it off and fit a suitable plug. Fit a suitable
But it is desirable that it should be installed and JUSQUAU FOND. fuse in the plug.
operated keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or more
away from persons body (excluding extremities: For British models For European Models
hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the Declaration of Conformity
Cet quipement est conforme aux limites dexposition power supply cord of this unit should be performed We declare, under our sole
aux rayonnements nonces pour un environnement only by qualified service personnel. responsibility, that this product
non contrl et respecte les rgles les
complies with the standards:
radiolectriques (RF) de la FCC lignes directrices IMPORTANT Safety
dexposition dans le Supplment C OET65 et The wires in the mains lead are coloured in
dexposition aux frquences radiolectriques (RF) Limits and methods of
accordance with the following code: measurement of radio disturbance characteristics
CNR-102 de lIC. Cet quipement met une nergie
Blue: Neutral Limits for harmonic current emissions
RF trs faible qui est considre conforme sans
Brown: Live Limitation of voltage changes, voltage fluctuations
valuation de lexposition maximale autorise.
Cependant, cet quipement doit tre install et utilis As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this and flicker
en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le apparatus may not correspond with the coloured RoHS Directive, 2011/65/EU
dispositif rayonnant et le corps ( lexception des markings identifying the terminals in your plug, Hereby, Onkyo Corporation, declares that this
extrmits : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles). proceed as follows: TX-NR626 is in compliance with the essential
The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to requirements and other relevant provisions of
For Canadian Models the terminal which is marked with the letter N or Directive 1999/5/EC.
coloured black. , Onkyo Corporation, ,
NOTE: THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS
COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003. The wire which is coloured brown must be connected TX-NR626
For models having a power cord with a polarized
to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or
plug:
coloured red. 1999/5/EC.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, Onkyo Corporation tmto prohlauje, e TX-NR626
MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, spluje zkladn poadavky a vechna pslun
FULLY INSERT. ustanoveni Smrnice 1999/5/ES.
Undertegnede Onkyo Corporation erklrer herved,
at flgende udstyr TX-NR626 overholder de
vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv
1999/5/EF.

En-4
Safety Information and Introduction
Hiermit erklrt Onkyo Corporation, dass sich das essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalin- 23764/SDPPI/2012
Complies with
Gert TX-NR626 in bereinstimmung mit den gen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG. IDA Standards 2371
DA106032
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen Niniejszym Onkyo Corporation deklaruje e
einschlgigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie TX-NR626 jest zgodny z zasadniczymi TA-20120424004
1999/5/EG befindet. wymaganiami i innymi waciwymi TRA
Kesolevaga kinnitab Onkyo Corporation seadme postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC. REGISTERED No
TX-NR626 vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E Eu, Onkyo Corporation, declaro que o TX-NR626 ER0086260/12
phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele cumpre os requisitos essenciais e outras provises DEALER No
teistele asjakohastele stetele. relevantes da Directiva 1999/5/EC. 527090
Onkyo Prin prezenta, Onkyo Corporation, declar c
Corporation TX-NR626 aparatul TX-NR626 este n conformitate cu
cerinele eseniale i cu alte prevederi pertinente Thank you for purchasing an Onkyo AV
ale Directivei 1999/5/CE. Receiver. Please read this manual thoroughly
1999/5/ before making connections and plugging in the
Onkyo Corporation tmto vyhlasuje, e TX-NR626
Por la presente, Onkyo Corporation, declara que a spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun unit.
este TX-NR626 cumple con los requisitos ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES. Following the instructions in this manual will
esenciales y otras exigencias relevantes de la enable you to obtain optimum performance and
Onkyo Corporation izjavlja, da je ta TX-NR626 v
Directiva 1999/5/EC. listening enjoyment from your new AV Receiver.
skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in drugimi
Par la prsente, Onkyo Corporation dclare que relevantnimi doloili direktive 1999/5/ES. Please retain this manual for future reference.
lappareil TX-NR626 est conforme aux exigences
Onkyo Corporation vakuuttaa tten ett TX-NR626
essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes
tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten
de la directive 1999/5/CE.
vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden Supplied Accessories
Con la presente Onkyo Corporation dichiara che ehtojen mukainen.
questo TX-NR626 conforme ai requisiti essenziali Make sure you have the following accessories:
Hrmed frklarar Onkyo Corporation att denna
ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla Indoor FM antenna ( page 19)
TX-NR626 fljer de vsentliga kraven och andra
direttiva 1999/5/CE. AM loop antenna ( page 19)
relevanta stadgar i Direktiv 1999/5/EC.
Ar o Onkyo Corporation deklar, ka TX-NR626 Power cord (Taiwanese models) ( page 21)
Hr me lsir Onkyo Corporation v yfir a varan
atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm Speaker cable labels ( page 12)
TX-NR626 er samrmi vi grunnkrfur og arar
un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem. Speaker setup microphone ( page 25)
krfur sem gerar eru tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
iuo Onkyo Corporation deklaruoja, kad is Remote controller (RC-866M) and two batteries (AA/R6)
Onkyo Corporation erklrer herved at denne
TX-NR626 atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas Quick Start Guide
TX-NR626 er i overensstemmelse med vesentlige
1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.
krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i direktiv * In catalogs and on packaging, the letter at the end of the
A Onkyo Corporation ezzennel kijelenti, hogy a 1999/5/EC. product name indicates the color. Specifications and
TX-NR626 tpus beren-dezs teljesti az alapvet
operations are the same regardless of color.
kvetelmnyeket s ms 1999/5/EK irnyelvben
meghatrozott vonatkoz rendelkezseket.
Hierbij verklaart Onkyo Corporation dat het toestel
l TX-NR626 in overeenstemming is met de

En-5
Safety Information and Introduction

Table of Contents Initial Setup ................................................................. 22


Selecting the Language
Advanced Operations
for the On-screen Setup Menus ............................. 22
Audyssey MultEQ: Auto Setup ................................. 22
On-screen Setup......................................................... 48
Safety Information and Introduction Source Connection ................................................... 23
Using the Quick Setup.............................................. 48
Remote Mode Setup................................................. 23
Using the Audio Settings of Quick Setup.................. 49
Important Safety Instructions ......................................2 Network Connection ................................................. 23
Using the Setup Menu (HOME)................................ 52
Precautions ...................................................................3 Terminating the Initial Setup ..................................... 23
Setup Menu Items .................................................... 52
Supplied Accessories...................................................5 Using the Automatic Speaker Setup......................... 24
1. Input/Output Assign .............................................. 53
Table of Contents..........................................................6 Performing Wireless LAN Setup ............................... 27
2. Speaker Setup...................................................... 55
Features .........................................................................7 3. Audio Adjust ......................................................... 57
Front & Rear Panels......................................................8 4. Source Setup........................................................ 58
Front Panel..................................................................8 Playback
5. Listening Mode Preset.......................................... 63
Display ........................................................................9 Playback ...................................................................... 29 6. Miscellaneous....................................................... 63
Rear Panel ................................................................10 Controlling Contents of USB or Network Devices..... 30 7. Hardware Setup.................................................... 64
Remote Controller.......................................................11 Understanding Icons on the Display ......................... 31 8. Remote Controller Setup ...................................... 68
Controlling the AV Receiver ......................................11 Playing an Audio from Bluetooth-enabled Device .... 31 9. Lock Setup............................................................ 68
Playing a USB Device............................................... 32 Zone 2.......................................................................... 69
Connections Listening to TuneIn ................................................... 32 Making Zone 2 Connections..................................... 69
Registering Other Internet Radio .............................. 34 Controlling Zone 2 Components............................... 70
Connecting the AV Receiver......................................12 Changing the Icon Layout
Connecting Your Speakers .......................................12 on the Network Service Screen.............................. 34
Connecting the TV/AV components ..........................15 Playing Music Files on a Server (DLNA) .................. 34 Controlling Other Components
About RIHD-compatible components........................16 Playing Music Files on a Shared Folder ................... 36
Controlling Other Components................................. 71
Operations that can be performed Remote Playback...................................................... 37
Preprogrammed Remote Control Codes .................. 71
with RIHD connection .............................................17 Listening to AM/FM Radio ........................................ 38
Looking up for Remote Control Codes ..................... 71
Confirm the settings ..................................................17 Playing Audio and Video from Separate Sources..... 40
Entering Remote Control Codes............................... 71
Connection Tips ........................................................17 Using the Listening Modes ....................................... 41
Remapping Colored Buttons .................................... 72
Connecting the Antennas..........................................19 Displaying Source Information.................................. 45
Remote Control Codes for Onkyo Components
Connecting Onkyo RI Components...........................20 Using the Sleep Timer .............................................. 45
Connected via RI ................................................... 72
Using Headphones....................................................20 Setting the Display Brightness.................................. 46
Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons ................... 72
Changing the Input Display....................................... 46
Resetting the Remote Controller .............................. 72
Muting the AV Receiver ............................................ 46
Turning On & Basic Operations Controlling Other Components ................................. 73
Using the Home Menu .............................................. 47
Using the Onkyo Dock.............................................. 75
Turning On/Off the AV Receiver ................................21 Controlling Your iPod/iPhone ................................... 76
Connecting the Power Cord ......................................21
Turning On ................................................................21
Turning Off ................................................................21 Appendix
Firmware Update Notification....................................22 Troubleshooting ......................................................... 77
About the HYBRID STANDBY indicator....................22 Firmware Update ........................................................ 85
About HDMI................................................................. 88
Network/USB Features............................................... 89
License and Trademark Information ........................ 91
Specifications ............................................................. 92

To reset the AV receiver, see page 77.

En-6
Safety Information and Introduction

Features Connections
6 HDMI Inputs and 2 Outputs
Amplifier 4K (up-scaling and Passthrough*)-compatible HDMI
Inputs
95 Watts/Channel @ 8 ohms (FTC)
* Compatible with HDMI IN 1 to HDMI IN 4 only
160 Watts/Channel @ 6 ohms (IEC)
Onkyo p for System Control
175 Watts/Channel @ 6 ohms (JEITA)
3 Digital Inputs (1 Optical/2 Coaxial)
WRATWide Range Amplifier Technology
(5 Hz to 100 kHz bandwidth) Component Video Switching (1 Input/1 Output)
Optimum Gain Volume Circuitry Banana Plug-Compatible Speaker Posts
* In Europe, using banana plugs to connect speakers to an
H.C.P.S. (High Current Power Supply) Massive
audio amplifier is prohibited.
High Power Transformer
Powered Zone 2
Processing Bi-Amping Capability for FL/FR with SBL/SBR
Internet Radio Connectivity
Incorporates Qdeo technology for HDMI Video Network Capability for Streaming Audio Files
Upscaling (to 4K Compatible) Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Connectivity
HDMI (Audio Return Channel, 3D, DeepColor, Wireless Music Playback via Bluetooth
x.v.Color, Lip Sync, 4K (up-scaling and
Front-Panel USB Input for Memory Devices
Passthrough), DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High
MHL-Enabled HDMI IN 1
Resolution Audio, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DSD and Multi-CH PCM)
Miscellaneous
Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio
Dolby Pro Logic IIz 40 FM/AM Presets
Non-Scaling Configuration Audyssey MultEQ to correct room acoustic
A-Form Listening Mode Memory problems
Direct Mode Audyssey Dynamic EQ for loudness correction
Pure Audio Mode (European, Australian and Asian Audyssey Dynamic Volume to maintain optimal
models) listening level and dynamic range
Music Optimizer for Compressed Digital Music files Crossover Adjustment
Phase Matching Bass System (40/50/60/70/80/90/100/120/150/200 Hz)
192 kHz/24-bit D/A Converters A/V Sync Control Function (up to 800 ms)
Powerful and Highly Accurate 32-bit Processing Auto Standby Function
DSP On-Screen Display via HDMI
Jitter Cleaning Circuit Technology Preprogrammed u-Compatible Remote

En-7
Safety Information and Introduction

Front & Rear Panels


Front Panel
(North American and Taiwanese models) (European, Australian and Asian models)

a bc d e fg h i jk l m n o p x

p q r s t u vw y
For detailed information, see the pages in i MEMORY button (38) t AUX INPUT AUDIO/VIDEO jacks
parentheses. j TUNING MODE button (38) u USB port (32)
a 8ON/STANDBY button (21) k DISPLAY button (45) v SETUP MIC jack (25)
b MUSIC OPTIMIZER button (North American l HOME button (47) w HYBRID STANDBY indicator (22)
and Taiwanese models) (50)
m TUNING q/w (38), PRESET e/r (38), cursor x RT/PTY/TP button (European, Australian and
c ZONE 2, OFF buttons (70) and ENTER buttons Asian models) (39)
d Wi-Fi indicator (27) n RETURN button y PURE AUDIO button and indicator (European,
e Remote control sensor (11) o MASTER VOLUME control (29) Australian and Asian models) (41)
f Display (9) p BLUETOOTH button and indicator (31, 68)
g LISTENING MODE buttons (41) q PHONES jack (20)
h DIMMER button (North American and r TONE and Tone Level buttons (49)
Taiwanese models) (46) s Input selector buttons (29)

En-8
Safety Information and Introduction

Display
s

ab cd e f g h i

jklm j d n o p q
For detailed information, see the pages in h Tuning indicators m NET indicator (32 to 36, 67)
parentheses. RDS indicator (excluding North American and n Message area
a Z2 (Zone 2) indicator (70) Taiwanese models) (39) o SLEEP indicator (45)
b 3D indicator AUTO indicator (38)
p Channel/Unit indicators
This lights when a 3D input signal is detected. TUNED indicator (38)
ch indicator
c Headphone indicator (20) FM STEREO indicator (38)
Hz indicator
d 1, 3 and cursor indicators (32) i MUTING indicator (46) m/ft indicator
e Listening mode and format indicators (41, 62) j Input indicators (18) dB indicator
f Audyssey indicator (24, 58) HDMI indicator (65) q ASb (Auto Standby) indicator (66)
Dynamic EQ indicator (59) DIGITAL indicator
Dynamic Vol indicator (59) k ARC (Audio Return Channel) indicator (66)
g M.Opt (Music Optimizer) indicator (50) l USB indicator (32)

En-9
Safety Information and Introduction

Rear Panel
(North American, European, Australian and Asian models) (Taiwanese models)

a b c d e f g n

hi j k lm

See Connecting Your Speakers for connection g Power cord (North American, European,
( pages 12 to 20). Australian and Asian models)
a u REMOTE CONTROL jack h DIGITAL IN COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks
b COMPONENT VIDEO IN and OUT jacks i GND screw
c ETHERNET port j Composite video and analog audio jacks
d FM ANTENNA jack and AM ANTENNA terminal (BD/DVD IN, CBL/SAT IN, GAME IN, PC IN,
e HDMI IN and HDMI output (HDMI OUT MAIN and TV/CD IN, PHONO IN)
HDMI OUT SUB) jacks k MONITOR OUT V jack
f SPEAKERS terminals l ZONE 2 LINE OUT jacks
(CENTER, FRONT, SURROUND, SURROUND m SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks
BACK or FRONT HIGH, ZONE 2) n AC INLET (Taiwanese models)

En-10
Safety Information and Introduction

Remote Controller For detailed information, see the pages in


parentheses.
*1 To control a component, you must first enter the remote
control code.
See Entering Remote Control Codes for more details
a 8 RECEIVER button (21) ( page 71).
Controlling the AV Receiver
b REMOTE MODE/INPUT SELECTOR buttons *2 These buttons can also be used when a REMOTE
To control the AV receiver, press RECEIVER to (29) MODE other than Receiver mode is selected.
select Receiver mode. c q/w/e/r and ENTER buttons Aiming the remote controller
d Q SETUP button (48) To use the remote controller, point it at the AV
*2 e Listening Mode buttons (41) receivers remote control sensor, as shown below.
a *2
f DIMMER button (46) Remote control sensor
b
g MUTING button (46) AV receiver
*1
h DISPLAY button (45)
RECEIVER
g *2 i VOL q/w button (29)
hc j RETURN button
*2 k HOME button (47)
i
l SLEEP button (45) Approx. 16 ft. (5 m)
d Tip
ac You can also use the remote controller to control Onkyo
Installing the batteries
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, CD player, and other
d j components.
See Entering Remote Control Codes for more details
k ( page 71).

Controlling the tuner


e To control the AV receivers tuner, press TUNER (or
RECEIVER).
Batteries (AA/R6)
You can select AM or FM by pressing TUNER
e repeatedly.
Note
a q/w buttons (38) If the remote controller doesnt work reliably, try replacing
bf l b D.TUN button (38) the batteries.
Dont mix new and old batteries or different types of
c DISPLAY button
batteries.
d CH +/ button (39) If you intend not to use the remote controller for a long time,
e Number buttons (38) remove the batteries to prevent damage from leakage or
corrosion.
Remove expired batteries as soon as possible to prevent
damage from leakage or corrosion.

En-11
Connections
Speaker Configuration To find the best position for your subwoofer, while
playing a movie or some music with good bass,
The following table indicates the channels you should experiment by placing your subwoofer at various
use depending on the number of speakers that you positions within the room, and choose the one that
have. provides the most satisfying results.
Connections No matter how many speakers you use, a powered You can connect the powered subwoofer with two
subwoofer is recommended for a really powerful and SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks respectively.
solid bass. The same signal is output from each jack.
To get the best from your surround sound system,
you need to set the speaker settings automatically Tip
( page 24) or manually ( page 55). If your subwoofer is unpowered and youre using an
external amplifier, connect the subwoofer pre out jack to an
Number of speakers 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 input on the amplifier.
Front speakers
Connecting the AV Center speaker Attaching the Speaker Cable Labels
Receiver Surround speakers
Surround back speaker*1


The speaker terminals are color-coded for
identification purpose.
Surround back speakers*1
Connecting Your Speakers Front high speakers*1 Speaker Color
Front left, Front high left, Zone 2 left White
ab cI J f Speaker Configuration Front right, Front high right, Zone 2 Red
5.1-channel: a b c d e f right
7.1-channel: a b c d e f + G H Center Green
7.1-channel: a b c d e f + I J Surround left Blue
Surround right Gray
*1 Front high and surround back speakers cannot be used Surround back left Brown
at the same time. Surround back right Tan

Using Powered Subwoofers The supplied speaker cable labels are also color-
coded and you should attach them to the positive (+)
side of each speaker cable in accordance with the
table above. Then all you need to do is to match the
de GH color of each label to the corresponding speaker
Front speakers terminal.
ab
Corner
c Center speaker position
de Surround speakers
f Subwoofer(s)
1/3 of wall
GH Surround back speakers
position
IJ Front high speakers

En-12
Connections
Connecting the Speaker Cables/Powered Subwoofers Before connecting the power cord, connect all of
Please connect a , b , c , d , e and f for 5.1-channel surround. your speakers and AV components. A setup wizard
is launched upon first-time use to let you perform
If youre using only one surround back b a the settings.
Front Front
speaker, connect it to the SURROUND speaker R speaker L
BACK or FRONT HIGH L terminals. Read the instructions supplied with your speakers.
By default, speakers for 7.1-channel surround are
c configured to use: front right/front left/center/
Center speaker surround right/surround left/surround back right/
surround back left/subwoofer.
Screw-type speaker terminals
Red Green White
Strip 1/2" to 5/8" (12 to 15 mm) of insulation from the
ends of the speaker cables, and twist the bare wires
tightly, as shown.
1/2" to 5/8" (12 to 15 mm)

Banana Plugs (North American models)


If you are using banana plugs, tighten the speaker
terminal before inserting the banana plug.
Do not insert the speaker code directly into the
center hole of the speaker terminal.
Gray Tan Brown Blue

Powered Powered Surround Surround back or Surround back or Surround


subwoofer subwoofer speaker R Front high speaker R Front high speaker L speaker L
f f e HJ GI d

Pay close attention to speaker wiring polarity. In other words, connect positive (+) terminals only to positive (+)
terminals, and negative () terminals only to negative () terminals. If you get them the wrong way around, the
sound will be out of phase and will sound unnatural.

En-13
Connections
Speaker Connection Precautions Dont connect more than one cable to each speaker Bi-amping the Front Speakers
(North American and Taiwanese models) You terminal. Doing so may damage the AV receiver.
can connect speakers with an impedance of Dont connect one speaker to several terminals.
between 6 and 16 ohms. If you use speakers with a Important:
When making the bi-amping connections, be sure to
lower impedance, and use the amplifier at high
remove the jumper bars that link the speakers tweeter
volume levels for a long period of time, the built-in
(high) and woofer (low) terminals.
amp protection circuit may be activated. Bi-amping can be used only with speakers that support
(European, Australian and Asian models) You bi-amping. Refer to your speaker manual.
can connect speakers with an impedance of
between 4 and 16 ohms. If the impedance of any of Bi-amping provides improved bass and treble
the connected speakers is 4 ohms or more, but less performance.
than 6 ohms, be sure to set the minimum speaker When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to
impedance to 4ohms ( page 55). If you use drive up to a 5.1 speaker system in the main room.
speakers with a lower impedance, and use the Perform bi-amping connections by using FRONT
amplifier at high volume levels for a long period of terminals and SURROUND BACK or FRONT HIGH
time, the built-in protection circuit may be activated. terminals as shown below.
Unnecessarily long, or very thin speaker cables may Once youve completed the bi-amping connections
affect the sound quality and should be avoided. and turned on the AV receiver, you must set the
Be careful not to short the positive and negative speaker setting to enable bi-amping ( page 55).
wires. Doing so may damage the AV receiver.
Make sure the metal core of the wire does not have
contact with the AV receivers rear panel. Doing so
may damage the AV receiver.

Tweeter (high)
Woofer (low)

Front right Front left

En-14
Connections

Connecting the TV/AV components C Use this jack to connect to the Satellite/cable set-
top box, etc.
Before connecting the power cord, connect all of your speakers and AV components. To display the setup D Use this jack to connect to the game consoles,
menu on the TV screen, connecting the TV to HDMI OUT MAIN is required. etc.
F Use this port to connect to a LAN port on a router
E I F G H D C B J A so the AV receiver can be connected to your
home network.
G Use jack and terminal here to connect the
supplied FM antenna and AM loop antenna.
H Use this jack to make connections using an
analog audio cable.
With this connection, you can also enjoy analog
audio from external components while you are in
Zone 2.
I Use this jack to make connections using a
component video cable.
J Use this jack to connect to the camcorder/MHL-
enabled mobile device, etc.

Tip
If you select the input selector button, the signal from To prevent interference, keep audio and video To listen to the audio of a component connected via HDMI
the component connected to the assigned jack is cables away from power cords and speaker cables. through your TVs speakers, enable HDMI Through
played. ( page 65) and set the AV receiver to standby mode.
Connections In the case of Blu-ray Disc/DVD players, if no sound is
output despite following the above-mentioned procedure,
set your Blu-ray Disc/DVD players HDMI audio settings to
A Use this jack to connect to the HDMI input of the PCM.
TV. If your TV doesnt support Audio Return Connect a turntable (MM) that has a built-in phono preamp
Channel (ARC)*1, you need to connect an optical to TV/CD IN, or connect it to PHONO IN with the phono
digital cable together with the HDMI cable to jack preamp turned off. If your turntable (MM) doesnt have a
Input
B C D J selector E. phono preamp, connect it to PHONO IN. If your turntable
buttons Another TV can be connected to the HDMI OUT has a moving coil (MC) type cartridge, youll need a
SUB jack. commercially available MC head amp or MC transformer to
Before making any AV connections, read the connect to PHONO IN. See your turntables manual for
*1 ARC is the function that carries the audio signal
manuals supplied with your AV components. details.
from the TV to jack A. With ARC, a single HDMI
Push plugs in all the way to make good connections cable can connect the TV and the AV receiver.
If your turntable has a ground wire, connect it to the AV
(loose connections can cause noise or receivers GND screw. With some turntables, connecting
malfunctions). B Use this jack to connect to your Blu-ray Disc/DVD the ground wire may produce an audible hum. If this
player, etc. happens, disconnect it.

En-15
Connections
MHL (Mobile High-Definition Link) Connecting to the Network (Optional) p
With its support for MHL (Mobile High-Definition Link), The AV receiver allows interoperability of the CEC
HDMI IN 1 allows you to deliver high-definition video The following diagram shows how you can connect
(Consumer Electronics Control) specified in the HDMI
from a connected mobile device. the AV receiver to your home network. In this
standard, which is known as RIHD. Various linked
example, its connected to a LAN port on a router,
operations can be performed by connecting the AV
which has a 4-port 100Base-TX switch built-in.
receiver to an RIHD-compatible TV, player, or
Network connection by wireless LAN is possible. See
recorder.
Performing Wireless LAN Setup for connections
Default setting is set to off, so it is required to change
( page 27).
the setting to on.
MHL-enabled Perform this setting after the initial setup.
Internet radio
mobile device, etc.
WAN Router
Modem About RIHD-compatible components
LAN
The following components are p-compatible
(As of January 2013).
TV
Sharp TV
Computer or media server Players/Recorders
Do not connect the AV receivers USB port to a USB Onkyo and Integra p-compatible players
port on your computer. Music on your computer Toshiba players and recorders
cannot be played through the AV receiver in this way. Sharp players and recorders (only when used
together with Sharp TV)
* Models other than those mentioned above may have some
interoperability if compatible with CEC, which is part of the
The default of the assignment for the input selector buttons and jacks are as shown below. These settings can
HDMI Standard, but operation cannot be guaranteed.
be changed. (The assignment for the composite video jacks and the analog audio jacks cannot be changed.)
Note
Input selector buttons HDMI jacks COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL IN COAXIAL Composite video and
jacks and OPTICAL jacks analog audio jacks For proper linked operations, do not connect more
p-compatible components than the quantities
BD/DVD HDMI IN 2 DIGITAL IN VIDEO/AUDIO IN
specified below, to the HDMI input terminal.
COAXIAL 1 BD/DVD
Blu-ray Disc/DVD players: up to three.
CBL/SAT HDMI IN 3 COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL IN VIDEO/AUDIO IN Blu-ray Disc/DVD recorders/Digital Video Recorders: up
IN COAXIAL 2 CBL/SAT
to three.
GAME HDMI IN 4 VIDEO/AUDIO IN Cable/Satellite Set-top boxes: up to four.
GAME Do not connect the AV receiver to another AV receiver/AV
PC HDMI IN 5 VIDEO/AUDIO IN PC amplifier via HDMI.
AUX HDMI IN 1 VIDEO/AUDIO IN AUX Proper linked operations are not guaranteed when more
TV/CD DIGITAL IN OPTICAL AUDIO IN TV/CD p-compatible components than the above-
mentioned quantities are connected.
PHONO AUDIO IN PHONO

En-16
Connections
On the TV, when you select anything other than the HDMI
Operations that can be performed with Confirm the settings jack to which the AV receiver is connected, the input on the
RIHD connection AV receiver will be switched to TV/CD.
1. Turn on the power for all connected components.
The AV receiver will automatically power on in conjunction
For p-compatible TV 2. Turn off the power of the TV, and confirm that the when it determines it to be necessary. Even if the AV
The following linked operations are enabled by power of the connected components is turned off receiver is connected to an p compatible TV or
connecting the AV receiver to an p-compatible automatically with the link operation. player/recorder, it will not power on if it is not necessary. It
TV. 3. Turn on the power of the Blu-ray Disc/DVD may not power on in conjunction when the TV is set to
player/recorder. output audio from the TV.
The AV receiver will enter standby mode when the
4. Start playback on the Blu-ray Disc/DVD Linked functions with the AV receiver may not work
TV is set to standby. depending on the component model connected. In such
You can set on the menu screen of the TV to either player/recorder, and verify the following:
cases, operate the AV receiver directly.
output the audio from the speakers connected to the The AV receiver automatically turns on, and
AV receiver, or from the speakers of the TV. selects the input to which the Blu-ray Disc/DVD
player/recorder is connected. Connection Tips
It is possible to output the audio coming from the
tuner or auxiliary input of your TV to the speakers of The TV automatically turns on, and selects the
input to which the AV receiver is connected. The video and audio signal flow
the AV receiver. (A connection such as an optical
digital cable or similar is required in addition to the 5. Following the operating instructions of the TV, Connect the AV receiver between the AV
HDMI cable.) select Use the TV speakers from the menu components and the TV. The signal from the AV
Input to the AV receiver can be selected with the screen of the TV, and confirm that the audio is components is carried through the AV receiver. You
remote controller of the TV. output from the speakers of the TV, and not from can enjoy the audio of the TV through the AV
Operations such as volume adjustment or similar for the speakers connected to the AV receiver. receiver.
the AV receiver can be performed from the remote 6. Select Use the speakers connected from the AV
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.
controller of the TV. receiver from the menu screen of the TV, and
confirm that the audio is output from the speakers
For p-compatible players/recorders connected to the AV receiver, and not from the TV Video, audio
The following linked operations are enabled by speakers.
connecting the AV receiver to an p-compatible AV receiver
Note
player/recorder.
Audio from DVD-Audio or Super Audio CD may not output Audio Video, audio
When playback is started on the player/recorder, AV
from the TV speakers. You will be able to output the audio
receiver will switch to the HDMI input of the
from the TV speakers by setting the audio output of the
player/recorder that is playing back. DVD player to 2ch PCM. (It may not be possible depending TV, projector, etc.
Operation of the player/recorder is possible using on the player models.)
the remote controller supplied with the AV receiver. Even if you set to output audio on the TV speakers, audio Video components can be connected by using any
will be output from the speakers connected to the AV one of the following video connection formats:
* Depending on the model used, not all operations may be receiver when you adjust the volume or switch the input on composite video, component video, or HDMI, the
available. the AV receiver. To output audio from the TV speakers, re- latter offering the best picture quality.
do the corresponding operations on the TV. Video input signals flow through the AV receiver as
Note In case of an p connection with u and u audio shown, with composite video and component video
Do not assign an HDMI IN to the TV/CD selector at this control compatible components, do not connect the u
time, otherwise appropriate CEC (Consumer Electronics
sources all being upconverted for the HDMI output(s).
cable at the same time.
Control) operation will not be guaranteed.

En-17
Connections

Video Signal Flow Chart Signal Selection Example Tip


Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc. Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc. When a signal is input via HDMI and the corresponding
input selector is selected, the HDMI indicator lights. In the
Composite Component HDMI Composite Component HDMI case of an optical or coaxial connection, the DIGITAL
IN IN indicator lights. In the case of an analog connection, neither
of the HDMI and DIGITAL indicators light.
AV receiver
AV receiver
MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT AV Cables and Jacks
Composite Component HDMI Composite Component HDMI

HDMI
TV, projector, etc. TV, projector, etc.
HDMI connections can carry digital video and audio.
To by-pass the upconversion, set the Picture
The composite video and component video outputs Mode setting to Bypass ( page 61).
pass through their respective input signals as they are.
Audio components can be connected by using any of
Note Component video
the following audio connection formats: analog,
Component video separates the luminance (Y) and
In order for the AV receiver to upconvert component input optical, coaxial, or HDMI.
to HDMI output, the source output must be set to 480i/576i. color difference signals (PB, PR), providing the best
When choosing a connection format, bear in mind
When signal is input at resolution of 480p/576p and more, picture quality (some TV manufacturers label their
that the AV receiver does not convert digital input
error message will be displayed. component video sockets slightly differently).
signals for analog line outputs and vice versa.
Signal Selection Y Green
If signals are present at more than one input, the
If signals are present at more than one input, the inputs will be selected automatically in the following CB/PB Blue
inputs will be selected automatically in the following order of priority: HDMI, digital, analog.
order of priority: HDMI, component video, composite CR/PR Red
Audio Signal Flow Chart
video.
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.
However, for component video only, regardless of Composite video
whether a component video signal is actually present, Analog Optical Coaxial HDMI Composite video is commonly used on TVs, DVDs,
if a component video input is assigned to the input IN and other video equipment.
selector, that component video input will be selected. AV receiver *1
*1 *1

And if no component video input is assigned to the Yellow


input selector, this will be interpreted as no OUT
HDMI
component video signal being present. *1 *2
In the Signal Selection Example shown below, video TV, projector, etc.
signals are present at both the HDMI and composite
*1 Depends on the Audio TV Out (Main) or Audio TV
video inputs. However, the HDMI signal is
Out (Sub) setting ( page 65).
automatically selected as the source and the video is
*2 This is possible when Audio Return Channel is set to
output by the HDMI outputs.
Auto ( page 66), the TV/CD input selector is
selected, and your TV is ARC capable.

En-18
Connections
Optical digital audio
Connecting the Antennas
Optical digital connections allow you to enjoy digital
sound such as PCM*1, Dolby Digital or DTS. The This section explains how to connect the supplied indoor FM antenna and AM loop antenna.
audio quality is the same as coaxial. The AV receiver wont pick up any radio signals without any antenna connected, so you must connect the
antenna to use the tuner.

(North American and (European, Australian


Coaxial digital audio Taiwanese models) and Asian models)
Coaxial digital connections allow you to enjoy digital
sound such as PCM*1, Dolby Digital or DTS. The
audio quality is the same as optical.
Insert the plug fully Insert the plug fully
Push. Insert wire. Release. into the jack. into the jack.
Orange

Analog audio (RCA)


Assembling the AM loop antenna Caution
Analog audio connections (RCA) carry analog audio.
Be careful not to injure
White yourself when using
Red thumbtacks.
Thumbtacks, etc.
*1 For PCM signals, the supported sampling rates are
32/44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz. With HDMI connections, 176.4
and 192 kHz are also supported.
Note
The AV receiver does not support SCART plugs. AM loop antenna (supplied) Indoor FM antenna (supplied)
The AV receivers optical digital jacks have shutter-type
covers that open when an optical plug is inserted and close
when its removed. Push plugs in all the way. Note
Caution Once your AV receiver is ready for use, youll need to tune into a radio station and position the antenna to achieve the best
possible reception.
To prevent shutter damage, hold the optical plug Keep the AM loop antenna as far away as possible from your AV receiver, TV, speaker cables, and power cords.
straight when inserting and removing.
Tip
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available outdoor FM antenna
instead.
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied indoor AM loop antenna, try using it with a commercially available
outdoor AM antenna.

En-19
Connections

Connecting Onkyo RI Components Using Headphones

1 Make sure that each Onkyo component is


connected with an analog audio cable
1 Connect a pair of stereo headphones with a
standard plug (1/4 inch or 6.3 mm) to the
(connection H in the hookup examples) PHONES jack.
( page 15). While the headphones plug is inserted in the
2 Make the u connection (see the illustration). PHONES jack, = indicator lights.
Note
3 If youre using an RI Dock, or cassette tape
deck, change the Input Display ( page 46). Always turn down the volume before connecting your
headphones.
While the headphones plug is inserted in the PHONES
With u (Remote Interactive), you can use the jack, the speakers are turned off. (The Zone 2
R L
following special functions: ANALOG
speakers are not turned off.)
AUDIO OUT
e.g., cassette tape deck When you connect a pair of headphones, the listening
System On/Auto Power On
mode is set to Stereo, unless its already set to Stereo,
When you start playback on a component connected Mono, Direct, or Pure Audio (European, Australian
via u, while the AV receiver is on standby, the AV and Asian models).
receiver will automatically turn on and select that R L
component as the input source. ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
RI Dock
Direct Change
When playback is started on a component connected
Note
via u, the AV receiver automatically selects that
component as the input source. Use only u cables for u connections. u cables are
supplied with Onkyo components.
Remote Control Some components have two u jacks. You can connect
You can use the AV receivers remote controller to either one to the AV receiver. The other jack is for
control your other u-capable Onkyo components, connecting additional u-capable components.
pointing the remote controller at the AV receivers Connect only Onkyo components to u jacks. Connecting
remote control sensor instead of the component. You other manufacturers components may cause a
malfunction.
must enter the appropriate remote control code first
Some components may not support all u functions. Refer
( page 72).
to the manuals supplied with your Onkyo components.
While Zone 2 is on, the System On/Auto Power On and
Direct Change u functions do not work.

En-20
Turning On & Basic Operations
the same circuit. If this is a problem, plug the AV receiver
into a different branch circuit.
Turning Off
Do not use a power cord other than the one supplied with
the AV receiver. The supplied power cord is designed 1 Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel.
Turning On & Basic exclusively for use with the AV receiver and should not be
used with any other equipment.
or
Press RECEIVER followed by 8RECEIVER on
Operations Never disconnect the power cord from the AV receiver
while the other end is still plugged into a wall outlet. Doing the remote controller.
so may cause an electric shock. Always disconnect the The AV receiver will enter standby mode. To
power cord from the wall outlet first, and then the AV prevent any loud surprises when you turn on the
receiver. AV receiver, always turn down the volume before
you turn it off.
Turning On
Tip
Turning On/Off the AV 1 Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel. The HYBRID STANDBY indicator may light depending on
Receiver or the status of settings ( page 22).
For details on power management settings, see Auto
Press RECEIVER followed by 8RECEIVER on
Standby ( page 66).
the remote controller.
Connecting the Power Cord If the HDMI Through setting is not set in standby mode, an
The AV receiver comes on and its display lights. MHL-enabled mobile device cannot be charged even if it is
connected.
1 (Taiwanese models)
Smooth Operation in a Few Easy Steps
Connect the supplied power cord to the AV (Initial Setup)
receivers AC INLET.
To ensure smooth operation, heres a few easy steps
to help you configure the AV receiver before you use
it for the very first time. These settings only need to
be made once. See Initial Setup for details
( page 22).

To AC wall outlet

2 Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet.

Note
Before connecting the power cord, connect all of your
speakers and AV components.
Turning on the AV receiver may cause a momentary power
surge that might interfere with other electrical equipment on

En-21
Turning On & Basic Operations

Firmware Update Notification Initial Setup 1 Use q/w on the AV receiver or remote
controller to select one of the following
When a new version of the firmware is available, the This section explains the settings that we recommend options, and then press ENTER.
notification window Firmware Update Available you to make before using the AV receiver for the very ` Yes:
pops up. This notification only appears when the AV first time. A setup wizard is launched upon first-time Continues to Audyssey MultEQ: Auto
receiver is connected to the Internet ( pages 16, use to let you perform those settings. Setup.
27). To perform the firmware update, follow the ` No:
Tip
instructions on screen. Skips the settings and terminates the initial
The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is
Use q/w and ENTER on the AV receiver or remote connected to HDMI OUT MAIN. setup. The setup wizard goes to
controller to select one of the options. Terminating the Initial Setup ( page 23).
` Update Now: You can always restart the initial setup by
Starts the firmware update.
Selecting the Language for the On-
selecting Initial Setup in the Hardware
Refer to Firmware Update ( page 85). screen Setup Menus Setup menu ( page 68).
` Remind me Later: This step determines the language used for the on-
The update notification will pop up again the screen setup menus. See Language in OSD
next time you turn the AV receiver on. Setup ( page 64).
` Never Remind me: Audyssey MultEQ: Auto Setup
Disables the automatic update notification. Tip
This step performs the automatic speaker setup.
Pressing HOME will close the setup wizard. To restart the
Tip
initial setup, select Initial Setup in the Hardware Setup
The update notification window can be enabled or disabled menu ( page 68). 1 Use q/w to select one of the following options,
in Update Notice ( page 67). and then press ENTER.
After selecting the language for on-screen setup
` Do it Now:
menus, a welcome screen is displayed.
About the HYBRID STANDBY indicator The automatic speaker setup is performed
Initial Setup
following instructions on screen. Refer to
By way of optimized circuitry, this function reduces step 2 of Using the Automatic Speaker
Welcome to initial setup. Have you connected all the speakers and devices?
power consumption when the AV receiver is in Before starting, please connect speakers and sources. Setup ( page 24). When this setting is
Now, would you like to start initial setup?
standby mode. The HYBRID STANDBY indicator will complete, the setup wizard continues to
1st Step : Audyssey MultEQ: Auto Setup
light in either of the following conditions: 2nd Step : Source Connection Source Connection.
3rd Step : Remote Mode Setup
HDMI Through is enabled (the HDMI indicator is 4th Step : Network Connection ` Do it Later:
Yes
off). No Skips this setting.
Network Standby is enabled (the NET indicator HOME Exit
Press ENTER and continue to Source
is off). Connection.
Note
If Zones are turned on or, if a mobile device connected to
HDMI IN 1 (MHL) is charging, the HYBRID STANDBY
indicator wont light.

En-22
Turning On & Basic Operations

Source Connection Remote Mode Setup 2 Follow the instructions on screen to perform
the network checking.
This step checks the connection of source With this step, you can enter remote control codes for The checking is complete when the message
components. the components you want to operate. Successfully connected. appears at the
middle of the screen. Press ENTER to terminate
1 Use q/w to select one of the following options, 1 Use q/w to select one of the following options, the initial setup.
and then press ENTER. and then press ENTER.
Tip
`Yes, Continue: ` Yes:
Performs the checkings. Performs the remote control code input. If you have selected Wireless, you need to perform
the wireless LAN setup. See Performing Wireless
`No, Skip: Refer to step 5 of Looking up for Remote
LAN Setup ( page 27). This completes the initial
Skips this step and continues to Remote Control Codes ( page 71). setup.
Mode Setup. ` No, Skip:
Skips this step and continues to Network 3 If an error message appears, select one of the
2 Select the input selector for which you want to
check the connection and press ENTER. Connection. following options and press ENTER.
` Retry:
The picture and sound of the corresponding 2 When youre finished, select one of the
following options and press ENTER.
Performs the checking again.
source should appear on screen with a ` No, Do it Later:
verification prompt. ` Yes, Done: Skips this step and terminates the initial
The setup wizard continues to Network
3 When prompted, use q/w to select one of the
Connection.
setup. The setup wizard goes to
Terminating the Initial Setup.
following options and then press ENTER.
` No, not yet:
`Yes:
You can enter other remote control codes.
Confirms that the source is properly
displayed.
`No:
Terminating the Initial Setup
Displays an error report. Follow the Network Connection This step ends the initial setup process.
troubleshooting instructions and recheck the
source. This step checks your network connection.
1 Press ENTER.
To restart the initial setup, select Initial Setup
4 Use q/w to select one of the following options,
1 Use q/w to select one of the following options, in the Hardware Setup menu ( page 68).
and then press ENTER.
and then press ENTER.
`Yes:
` Yes:
Returns to step 2.
Performs the checkings.
`No, Done Checking:
` No, Skip:
The setup wizard continues to Remote
Skips this step and terminates the initial
Mode Setup.
setup.

En-23
Turning On & Basic Operations

Using the Automatic Speaker Setup Measurement procedure Note


To create a listening environment in your home Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise and
With the supplied calibrated microphone, Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) can disrupt the room
theater that all listeners will enjoy, Audyssey MultEQ
Audyssey MultEQ automatically determines the measurements. Close windows, televisions, radios, air
takes measurements at up to six positions within the
number of speakers connected, their size for conditioners, fluorescent lights, home appliances, light
listening area. Position the microphone at ear height
purposes of bass management, optimum crossover dimmers, or other devices. Turn off the cell phone (even if
of a seated listener with the microphone tip pointed it is not in use) or place it away from all audio electronics.
frequencies to the subwoofer (if present), and
directly at the ceiling using a tripod. Do not hold the The microphone picks up test tones played through each
distances from the primary listening position.
microphone in your hand during measurements as speaker as Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and
Audyssey MultEQ then removes the distortion caused
this will produce inaccurate results. Speaker Setup runs.
by room acoustics by capturing room acoustical Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup
problems over the listening area in both the frequency First measurement position cannot be performed while a pair of headphones is
and time domain. The result is clear, well-balanced Also referred to as the Main Listening Position, this connected.
sound for everyone. Audyssey MultEQ can be used refers to the most central position where one would
with Audyssey Dynamic EQ and normally sit within the listening environment.
Audyssey Dynamic Volume ( page 59). Audyssey MultEQ uses the measurements from this
Before using this function, connect and position all of position to calculate speaker distance, level, and the
your speakers. optimum crossover value for the subwoofer.
Audyssey MultEQ offers two ways of measuring: the Second-sixth measurement positions
Audyssey Quick Start and Audyssey MultEQ
These are the other listening positions (i.e., the
Full Calibration.
places where the other listeners will sit). You can
Audyssey Quick Start uses the measurement measure up to six positions.
from one position to perform the speaker setting
only.
Audyssey MultEQ Full Calibration uses the
TV
measurement from six positions to correct room
response in addition to the speaker setting.
The more positions are used in measuring, the better
the listening environment will become. We def
recommend using a measurement from six positions cab
to create the best listening environment.
The Quick Start takes 2 minutes and Full Calibration
takes about 15 minutes. : Listening area a to f: Listening position
Total measurement time varies depending on the
number of speakers.

En-24
Turning On & Basic Operations

1 Turn on the AV receiver and the connected TV. 4 Adjust the subwoofer volume level to 75 dB,
and then press ENTER.
9 Use q/w to select an option, and then press
On the TV, select the input to which the AV ENTER.
receiver is connected. Test tones are played through the subwoofer.
MultEQ: Auto Setup
Use the volume control on the subwoofer.
2 Set the speaker setup microphone at the Main -- Review Speaker Configuration --
AUDYSSEY

Listening Position a, and connect it to the Note Subwoofer Yes


Front 100Hz
SETUP MIC jack. If your subwoofer does not have a volume control, Center 40Hz
Surround 100Hz
SETUP MIC jack disregard the displayed level and press ENTER to Front High None
Surround Back 120Hz
proceed to the next step. Surround Back Ch 2ch
If you set the subwoofers volume control to its
Save
maximum and the level displayed is lower than 75 dB, Cancel
leave the subwoofers volume control at its maximum
and press ENTER to proceed to the next step. The options are:
` Save:
5 Use q/w to select Audyssey Quick Start or Save the calculated settings and exit
Speaker setup microphone Audyssey MultEQ Full Calibration, and then Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and
press ENTER. Speaker Setup.
The speaker setting menu appears. 6 Press ENTER. ` Cancel:
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Cancel Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction
Note Speaker Setup starts. and Speaker Setup.
The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is Test tones are played through each speaker as
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN. If your TV is Tip
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker
connected to other video outputs, use the AV You can view the calculated settings for the speaker
Setup runs. This process takes a few minutes.
receivers display when changing settings. configuration, speaker distances, and speaker levels
Please refrain from talking during
by using e/r.
3 When youve finished making the settings,
press ENTER.
measurements and do not stand between
speakers and the microphone. 10 Use q/w to select a target, and use e/r to
MultEQ: Auto Setup Do not disconnect the speaker setup microphone change the setting.
Speakers Type (Front)
AUDYSSEY
Normal
during Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and After the results of Audyssey MultEQ have been
Powered Zone 2
Surround Back/Front High
No
Surround Back
Speaker Setup, unless you want to cancel the saved, the menu will display the Audyssey
Subwoofer Yes setup. ( page 58), Dynamic EQ ( page 59),
Perform the 2. Speaker Setup according to your If you select Audyssey Quick Start, you will go Dynamic Volume ( page 59) settings.
speaker configuration: to step 9.
Note
Speakers Type (Front) ( page 55)
Powered Zone 2 ( page 55)
7 Place the speaker setup microphone at the
next position, and then press ENTER.
When Audyssey Quick Start has been used for
measurement, Audyssey cannot be selected.
Surround Back/Front High ( page 56) Audyssey MultEQ performs more These settings are applied to all input selectors.
Subwoofer ( page 56)
measurements. This takes a few minutes.
If you use a powered subwoofer(s), go to step 4. 11 Press ENTER.
If not, go to step 5. 8 When prompted, repeat step 7.
12 Disconnect the speaker setup microphone.

En-25
Turning On & Basic Operations

Note Error Messages The setup of the speaker can be done manually
You can cancel Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and While Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and ( page 55).
Speaker Setup at any point in this procedure simply by Speaker Setup is in progress, one of the error The setup of the volume level of each speaker also
disconnecting the setup microphone. can be done manually ( pages 56, 57).
messages below may appear.
Do not connect or disconnect any speakers during
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup. MultEQ: Auto Setup

If the AV receiver is muted, it will be unmuted automatically AUDYSSEY Using a Powered Subwoofer
when Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Ambient noise is too high.
If youre using a powered subwoofer and it outputs
Setup starts.
very low-frequency sound at a low volume level, it
Changes to the room after Audyssey MultEQ Room
may not be detected by Audyssey MultEQ Room
Correction and Speaker Setup requires you run
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup Correction and Speaker Setup.
again, as room EQ characteristics may have changed. Retry If the Subwoofer appears on the Review Speaker
Cancel
Configuration screen as No, increase the
Error message subwoofers volume to the half-way point, set it to its
highest crossover frequency, and then try running
The options are: Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker
` Retry: Setup again. Note that if the volume is set too high
Try again. and the sound distorts, detection issues may occur,
` Cancel: so use an appropriate volume level. If the subwoofer
Cancel Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and has a low-pass filter switch, set it to Off or Direct.
Speaker Setup. Refer to your subwoofers instruction manual for
Ambient noise is too high. details.
The background noise is too loud. Remove the
source of the noise and try again.
Speaker Matching Error!
The number of speakers detected was different
from that of the first measurement. Check the
speaker connection.
Writing Error!
This message appears if saving fails. Try saving
again. If this message appears after 2 or 3
attempts, contact your Onkyo dealer.
Speaker Detect Error
This message appears if a speaker is not detected.
No means that no speaker was detected.
Tip
See Speaker Configuration for appropriate settings
( page 12).

En-26
Turning On & Basic Operations

Performing Wireless LAN Setup 5 Use q/w to select Network Connection, and PIN code method
e/r to select Wireless, and then press 1. Use q/w to select PIN Code and then press
A wireless LAN (WLAN) is a local area network that ENTER ( page 67). ENTER.
relies on wireless communication. The Wireless Setup menu is displayed on An 8-digit PIN code is displayed. The PIN
To achieve a wireless network connection, you will screen. code is displayed scrolling on the AV
need the following component: Tip
receivers display.
2. Input the provided code in your Access Point.
Access point The same setting is available even if Wireless is
selected in Network Connection in initial setup For information on the registration process,
Also known as the base station, it links your AV please refer to the instruction manual
( page 23).
receiver (wireless client) with a PC or network. provided with your Access Point device.
Access points fall into two categories: the bridge 6 Press q/w to select (North American models)
type that only performs data relay in a local area Push Button Configuration (Other 7 Press ENTER to confirm.
network, or the router type that has a built-in router Routers)*1/(excluding North American Connection to your Access Point starts and Wi-Fi
functionality. models) Push Button Configuration (Select indicator flashes. After the connection to your
from Router), and press ENTER. Access Point is completed, Wi-Fi indicator lights
To achieve a wireless network connection, it is The method to make settings by Push Button and the connection status is displayed on the
necessary to perform the wireless LAN setup. The Configuration is displayed, providing the screen.
setup can be done either automatically or manually. following two options: This completes the wireless LAN setup.
You use your AV receiver as a wireless client You can review your setup with the Status
Tip
(wireless terminal) and connect it to a PC or to the option on the Wireless Setup menu.
*1 (North American models) To connect to Linksys
Internet. Note
E/EA Router, select Push Button Configuration
(Linksys E/EA Router) and make settings If Wi-Fi indicator doesnt light, the connection to your
Automatic wireless LAN setup following the instructions on the screen. Access Point is not done successfully. Configure this
setting again ( page 80).
Push Button method
1 Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.
1. Use q/w to select Push Button and then
press ENTER.
2 Use e/r or q/w to select Setup, and then
2. Press the WPS button on your Access Point
press ENTER.
device.
3 Use q/w to select Hardware Setup, and then
Tip
press ENTER.
How long the WPS button should be pressed differs
4 Use q/w to select Network, and then press depending on the type of Access Point device. Refer
ENTER. to the instruction manual provided with your Access
Point device for operations.

En-27
Turning On & Basic Operations
Manual wireless LAN setup
7 Use q/w to select the Access Point you wish to 8 Select OK and press ENTER.
connect to, and then press ENTER. Connection to your Access Point starts and Wi-Fi
Depending on your encryption settings, the indicator flashes. After the connection to your
1 Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.
security of your Access Point will provide one of Access Point is completed, Wi-Fi indicator lights
and the connection status is displayed on the
2 Use e/r or q/w to select Setup, and then the following patterns:
screen.
press ENTER.
WEP method
This completes the wireless LAN setup.
3 Use q/w to select Hardware Setup, and then 1. Use q/w to select Default Key ID and then You can review your setup with the Status
press ENTER. press ENTER. option on the Wireless Setup menu.
4 Use q/w to select Network, and then press 2. Use q/w to choose an ID between 1 and 4,
Note
ENTER. and then press ENTER.
If Wi-Fi indicator doesnt light, the connection to your
3. Use q/w to select Password and then press
5 Use q/w to select Network Connection, and
ENTER.
Access Point is not done successfully. Configure this
e/r to select Wireless, and then press setting again ( page 80).
ENTER ( page 67). 4. Use the keyboard on screen to enter the
The Wireless Setup menu is displayed on password and confirm with OK.
screen. WPA/WPA2 method
Tip 1. Use q/w to select Password and then press
The same setting is available even if Wireless is ENTER.
selected in Network Connection in initial setup 2. Use the keyboard on screen to enter the
( page 23). password and confirm with OK.
6 Use q/w to select Search Wireless Network No encryption
and then press ENTER. If your Access Point device is not secured by
A list of available Access Points is displayed. encryption, there is no need to input any secret
Tip key.
If Access Point you wish to connect to is not displayed
Tip
in the list of available Access Points, the setting also
can be made by entering SSID, Security, and When you select the Access Point you wish to connect to
Password manually after selecting Direct Input. from the list of available Access Points, SSID and
Security are automatically displayed. These settings can
be changed manually.

En-28
Playback
Playing Music Files on a Shared Folder
( page 36) 2 Select the input on the AV receiver to play the
AV components.
Remote Playback ( page 37) Press the input selector button to which the AV
Listening to AM/FM Radio ( page 38) components to be played is connected.
Playing Audio and Video from Separate Sources
Playback ( page 40)
Press the TV/CD button to play the audio of the
TV. Switching the input on the TV is also
Controlling Other Components ( page 71) required. Select the input to which the AV
Using the Onkyo Dock ( page 75) receiver is connected by using the TV remote
controller.
* For the CEC compatible TV and the AV components
1 connected with HDMI connections, switching the input
is automatically performed. Switch the input manually
2 for other AV components.
Playback 3 Select the desired listening mode.
This section describes the basic operation such as 4 You can enjoy various types of listening mode.
playback, listening mode, and other useful functions. The listening mode is switched by pressing
Reading this manual from the beginning to this Listening mode button on the AV receiver or the
section helps you to understand the basic remote controller.
connection/setup/operation.
4 Adjust the volume.
Screen Saver You can enjoy the surround sound.
If there is no video signal on the current input source 3
and no operation for a specific time (three minutes by Tip
default), a screen saver automatically comes on. 1 2 3 4 When listening to an HDMI component through the AV
receiver, set the HDMI component so that its video can be
Tip
seen on the TV screen (on the TV, select the input of the
The time until the screen saver activates itself can HDMI component connected to the AV receiver). If the TV
be changed in the Screen Saver setting power is off or the TV is set to another input source, this
( page 64). may result in no sound from the AV receiver or the sound
may be cut off.
The screen will return to its previous state if the AV
receiver is operated.
See also:
(Actual location of buttons depends on the country.)
Playing an Audio from Bluetooth-enabled Device
( page 31)
Playing a USB Device ( page 32) 1 Turn on the AV receiver, the TV and the AV
components.
Listening to TuneIn ( page 32) * When you operate the AV receiver with the remote
Registering Other Internet Radio ( page 34) controller, press the RECEIVER button first.
Playing Music Files on a Server (DLNA)
( page 34)

En-29
Playback

Controlling Contents of USB or a TOP MENU o REPEAT


This button displays the top menu for each media or Press this button repeatedly to cycle through the repeat
Network Devices service. modes.
( page 31) b q/w and ENTER
These buttons navigate through the menus. Tip
Press USB or NET first. e/r See Controlling Other Components about the operation of
other components ( page 71).
This button cycles through pages.
The AV receiver supports Album art display, and displaying
c 1 image file format of JPEG, PNG, and BMP is possible. The
This button starts playback. image file format cannot be displayed in either of the
d 7 following cases:
Total number of horizontal and vertical pixels is more than
This button selects the beginning of the current song.
2048 x 2048.
Pressing this button twice selects the previous song.
Image data size (JPEG/PNG) is more than 4 MB.
e 5
h This button fast-reverses the current song.
Note
The buttons you can use will differ depending on the
f 3
devices and media used for playback.
This button pauses playback. When you select the NET input selector on the AV receiver
g SEARCH for the first time, DISCLAIMER screen is displayed on TV.
a i You can toggle between the playback screen and the Please read the contents thoroughly before using network
list screen during playback. service. Select Agree if you agree with the content. If you
b disagree, network service is not available on the AV
h DISPLAY
j receiver ( page 84).
This button switches between song information during
c k playback.
d l Press this button while the list screen is displayed to
return to the playback screen.
e m
i MENU
f n This button displays the menu of Internet radio
g o services.
j RETURN
This button returns to the previous menu.
k 4
This button fast-forwards the current song.
l 6
This button selects the next song.
m 2
This button stops playback.
n RANDOM
This button performs random playback.

En-30
Playback

Understanding Icons on the Display Playing an Audio from Bluetooth- Pairing the AV receiver with a Bluetooth-
enabled device
enabled Device
This section describes icons that appear on the AV
receivers display during media playback. Pairing is an operation where Bluetooth-enabled
About the Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices register with each other beforehand. Use the
Icon Description procedure below to pair the AV receiver with your
Bluetooth wireless technology is a short-range
Folder Bluetooth-enabled device. Once a pairing operation is
wireless technology that enables wireless data
performed, it does not need to be performed again.
communication between digital devices. Bluetooth
Track
wireless technology operates within a range of about
15 meters (49 feet). You do not need to use a cable 1 Place the Bluetooth-enabled device within
1 meter (3.3 feet) from the AV receiver.
Playback
for connection, nor is it necessary for the devices to

Pause
face one another, such is the case with infrared 2 Select BLUETOOTH in Input in Quick
Setup, and press ENTER ( page 48).
technology.
BLUETOOTH indicator flashes and the AV
Fast Forward Tip
receiver is put to pairing mode.
The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is
Now Pairing appears on the AV receivers
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN.
Fast Reverse display.
If your Bluetooth-enabled device supports A2DP protocol,
its audio file will play through the AV receiver. Tip
Artist Connection is not guaranteed for all Bluetooth-enabled
The same operation can be done by pressing
devices.
BLUETOOTH button on the AV receiver.
Album When connecting a Bluetooth-enabled device paired
Operating on the Remote Controller with the AV receiver to the AV receiver, BLUETOOTH
Repeat One Track input selector is automatically selected.
The Bluetooth-enabled device can be operated by the
If you connect the AV receiver to another Bluetooth-
supplied remote controller. enabled device, hold down BLUETOOTH button until
Repeat Folder (USB Device)
Tip BLUETOOTH indicator flashes or make settings in
Status of Bluetooth for pairing ( page 68).
Repeat To operate your Bluetooth-enabled device by the remote
Some Bluetooth-enabled device may need to re-
controller, the Bluetooth-enabled device must support
establish pairing for each connection.
Shuffle profile: AVRCP.
Operation by the remote controller is not guaranteed for all Note
Bluetooth-enabled devices. BLUETOOTH cannot be selected, if youve selected
NET or USB as input selector in Zone 2.

En-31
Playback
When disconnecting on your Bluetooth-enabled device,
3 During this period (about 2 minutes), you can
operate the Bluetooth-enabled device to pair
BLUETOOTH indicator on the AV receiver will go off.
Note
If there is no sound output even after the pairing is done While the message Connecting... appears on the AV
with the AV receiver. successfully, consult the instruction manual of the receivers display, do not disconnect the USB cable
Bluetooth-enabled device, and then select the model name supplied with the USB device from the USB port.
Note
of the AV receiver as the audio output device.
When establishing a connection with the AV receiver,
While connected to a Bluetooth-enabled device, the AV Listening to TuneIn
select the profile (A2DP, AVRCP) at the Bluetooth-
receiver cannot be detected and a connection cannot be
enabled device. If the Bluetooth-enabled device does
established from another Bluetooth-enabled device. You need to connect the AV receiver to your home
not support the AVRCP profile, you cannot perform
If you cannot connect with a paired Bluetooth-enabled network ( pages 16, 27).
playback or other operations with the AV receiver.
device, perform the pairing operation between the AV
Tip receiver and the Bluetooth-enabled device again. Tip
For details on the Bluetooth connection, refer to the Note The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is
instruction manual of the Bluetooth-enabled device. connected to HDMI OUT MAIN.
Due to the characteristic of Bluetooth wireless technology,
4 Once the AV receiver is detected and the
model name of the AV receiver appears on the
the sound played on the AV receiver may slightly delay from
the sound played on the Bluetooth-enabled device.
TuneIn is a new radio service which offers the music,
sports and news all over the world.
display of your Bluetooth-enabled device, Over 70,000 radio stations and 2 million on-demand
select the model name. Playing a USB Device programs are registered, and you can easily enjoy
When a Bluetooth connection is established them by selecting stations or programs of your
successfully, BLUETOOTH indicator will light. Tip choice. TuneIn is preprogrammed on the AV receiver.
Tip The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is
The model name appeared on the display of your connected to HDMI OUT MAIN. 1 Press NET.
Bluetooth-enabled device is Onkyo TX-NR626. The network service screen appears, and the
This section explains how to play music files from a
NET indicator lights. If it flashes, the AV receiver
5 If passkey* is required on the display of the
Bluetooth-enabled device, enter 0000.
USB device (e.g., USB flash drives and MP3 players).
is not connected to the network correctly. If wired
See also:
LAN connection is selected, verify that the
The AV receiver only supports numerical Network/USB Features ( page 89). Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV
passkey up to 4 digits.
receiver. If wireless LAN connection is selected,
* Passkey may be called Passcode, PIN code, PIN
number or Password.
1 Press USB to select the USB input.
verify that the Wi-Fi indicator lights.

6 Play back the desired music on the Bluetooth- 2 Plug your USB device into the AV receivers
USB port.
Tip
enabled device. The same operation can be done by selecting
The audio is output from the AV receiver. The USB indicator lights. It will flash if the AV Network Service in the Home menu.
receiver cannot read the USB device.
2 Use q/w/e/r to select TuneIn and then
Tip 3 Press ENTER. press ENTER.
A list of the devices contents appears. To open a
The AV receiver may not work as normal depending on the
circumstance even though the AV receiver is placed within folder, use q/w to select it, and then press
the 15 meters range. In such cases, get the Bluetooth- ENTER.
enabled device closer to the AV receiver and retry the
operation. 4 Use q/w to select a music file, and press
ENTER or 1 to start playback.

En-32
Playback
Setting an TuneIn account Adding TuneIn radio stations or programs to My
3 Use q/w to select a station or a program, and
Presets
then press ENTER. To create a user account for TuneIn, open a browser
Playback starts. Select "TuneIn", and press ENTER button to display
window such as Internet Explorer, and connect to a folder of My Presets on the screen that displays
tunein.com website. With a TuneIn account, you can Category/Area, etc. Store your favorite stations or
tunein
quickly search and browse for stations and programs programs in this folder.
at tunein.com website and save as your favorites
1. Select radio stations or programs, and press
which will automatically appear in your AV receiver
MENU button on the remote controller.
My Music My Presets account. If you have a TuneIn account,
0 : 11
select Login and then I have a TuneIn account 2. Use q/w to select Add to My Presets, and
Great Artist
My Favorite
on the top list. Enter your user name and password to press ENTER.
Go to Menu
login. Tip
Tip If no radio stations or programs are stored in My Presets,
Either of the following menus can be selected by My Presets folder will not be displayed.
Select Login with a registration code, and associate a
pressing the MENU button on the remote controller or device from my page on TuneIn website by using a
pressing ENTER button to select Go to Menu. registration code displayed on the screen. This allows you
` Add to My Presets to login without entering a user name and a password.
In this menu, stations or programs can be stored
in My Presets. Adding TuneIn radio stations or programs to
` Remove from My Presets My Favorites/My Presets
In this menu, stations or programs stored in My
There are two ways you can register specific Internet
Presets can be deleted.
radio stations (programs) from the TuneIn.
` Report a problem
This menu is used to report problems on TuneIn Adding to My Favorites
service or resolve the problems in a wizard style. The selected program will be added to My
` View Schedule Favorites on the network service screen, which
In this menu, program listings of stations or appears when pressing NET.
programs can be displayed. 1. Select radio stations or programs, and press
` Clear recents MENU button on the remote controller.
In this menu, all the stations and programs 2. Use q/w to select Add to My Favorites, and
stored in Recents can be deleted. press ENTER.
` Add to My Favorites 3. Use q/w/e/r to select OK, and press ENTER.
In this menu, stations or programs can be stored
Tip
in My Favorites.
You can rename the stations saved in My Favorites
( page 34).

En-33
Playback

Registering Other Internet Radio 5 Click Save to save the Internet radio station. Changing the Icon Layout on the
The Internet radio station is then added to My Network Service Screen
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home Favorites. To play the registered station, press
network ( pages 16, 27). NET, and then select My Favorites on the Tip
Tip network service screen. A list of registered
You need to connect your TV to the HDMI output (HDMI
Internet radio stations appears. Select the one
The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is OUT MAIN) to make the following on-screen setting.
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN. that you saved and press ENTER.
The layout of icons can be customized by switching
Internet radio URLs in the following formats are their positions on the network service screen.
Tip
supported: PLS, M3U, and podcast (RSS). However,
If you want to add a new station directly from My
depending on the type of data or audio format used
by the Internet radio station, you may not be able to Favorites, select an empty slot in the list and press MENU. 1 Press NET.
The network service screen appears.
Then, select Create New Station and press ENTER.
listen to some stations.
Pressing ENTER again will display the keyboard screen. Tip
To listen to other Internet radio stations, you must Use that keyboard to enter the stations name and URL The same operation can be done by selecting
register your station in My Favorites of the network respectively, and then press ENTER. Network Service in the Home menu.
service screen, as described below. If you want to delete a station saved in My Favorites,
Note
press MENU with the station selected or while the station is 2 Press MODE/D (blue) on the remote controller.
playing. Then, use q/w to select Delete from My
Services available may vary depending on the region. See
the separate instructions for more information.
Favorites and press ENTER. You can also delete stations 3 Use q/w/e/r to select an icon to move, and
from the Web Setup. then press ENTER.
Certain network service or contents available through this If you want to rename a station, select the desired station
device may not be accessible in case the service provider
terminates its service.
and press MENU. Then, use q/w to select Rename this 4 Use q/w/e/r to select another icon as the
station and press ENTER. destination, and then press ENTER.
You can save up to 40 Internet radio stations. The icons switch positions and the message
1 Select Network on the Setup menu to verify
your IP address ( page 67).
Completed! appears.

Take a note of the IP address.


Playing Music Files on a Server (DLNA)
2 On your computer, start your web browser.
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home
network ( pages 16, 27).
3 Enter the AV receivers IP address in the
browsers Internet address (URL) field. Tip
If you are using Internet Explorer, you can also The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is
enter the URL by selecting Open... on the File connected to HDMI OUT MAIN.
menu.
This section explains how to play music files on a
Information on the AV receiver is then shown on
computer or media server through the AV receiver
your Internet browser (Web Setup).
(Server Playback).
4 Click on the My Favorites tab, and enter the
Internet radio stations name and URL.

En-34
Playback
Windows Media Player Setup
2 On the Stream menu, select Turn on media
streaming.
3 Use q/w/e/r to select DLNA, and press
ENTER.
Windows Media Player 11 Setup A dialog box appears.
This section explains how to configure Windows 4 Use q/w to select a server, and then press
Media Player 11 so that the AV receiver can play the
Tip ENTER.
music files stored on your computer. If the media streaming is already activated, clicking on The menu is displayed according to the server
More streaming options... in the Stream menu will functions.
display a list of the playback devices connected to the
1 Start Windows Media Player 11.
network. You can skip step 3. Note
The search function does not work with media servers
2 On the Library menu, select Media 3 Move your cursor and click on Turn on media
streaming.
which do not support this function.
Sharing. Photos and movies stored on a media server cannot
The Media Sharing dialog box appears. A list of media server appears. Wording may vary be accessed from the AV receiver.
slightly depending on the network location. Depending on the sharing settings in the media server,
3 Select the Share my media check box, and
the AV receiver may not able to access the content.
then click OK. 4 On the Media streaming options, select the
AV receiver and confirm that it is set to
See the instruction manual of the media server.
A list of the supported devices appears.

4 Select the AV receiver in the list, and then


Allowed. 5 Use q/w to select an item, and then press
ENTER or 1 to start playback.
click Allow. 5 Click OK to close the dialog box.
The corresponding icon will be checked. This completes the Windows Media Player 12
dlna
configuration.
5 Click OK to close the dialog box.
You can now play the music files in your
This completes the Windows Media Player 11
Windows Media Player 12 library.
configuration. My favorite song 1
You can now play the music files in your 0 :11 / 3:00
Playing music files on a server (DLNA) Artist name
Windows Media Player 11 library through the AV My favorite album

receiver.
Tip 1 Start your computer or media server.
Note
Windows Media Player 11 can be downloaded for free
from the Microsoft web site. 2 Press NET.
Depending on the media server, 5/4/3 may not
The network service screen appears, and the work.
NET indicator lights. If it flashes, the AV receiver If the message No Item. appears, this means that no
Windows Media Player 12 Setup
is not connected to the network correctly. If wired information can be retrieved from the server. In this
This section explains how to configure Windows LAN connection is selected, verify that the case, check your server, network, and AV receiver
Media Player 12 so that the AV receiver can play the Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV connections.
music files stored on your personal computer. receiver. If wireless LAN connection is selected,
verify that the Wi-Fi indicator lights.
1 Start Windows Media Player 12.
Tip
The same operation can be done by selecting
Network Service in the Home menu.

En-35
Playback
Creating a shared folder Playing music files on a shared folder
Playing Music Files on a Shared Folder
In order to enjoy Home Media, you must first create a
This section explains how to play music files on a 1 Right-click the folder that you want to share.
shared folder on your computer.
computer or NAS (Network Attached Storage)
through the AV receiver. 2 Select Properties.
1 Press NET.
3 On the Sharing tab, select Advanced The network service screen appears, and the
Windows 8/Windows 7 Setup
Sharing. NET indicator lights. If it flashes, the AV receiver
is not connected to the network correctly. If wired
Setting the sharing options 4 Check the check box of Share this folder
and then click OK. LAN connection is selected, verify that the
Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV
1 Select Choose homegroup and sharing
options on the Control Panel. 5 Under Network File and Folder Sharing, receiver. If wireless LAN connection is selected,
select Share. verify that the Wi-Fi indicator lights.
Tip
If this option is not available, verify that View by: is set
6 Select Everyone from the pull-down menu,
click Add, and then click Share.
Tip

to Category. The same operation can be done by selecting


Tip Network Service in the Home menu.
2 Select Change advanced sharing settings.
With this setting, everyone is allowed to access the
2 Use q/w/e/r to select Home Media, and
folder. If you want to assign a user name and press ENTER.
3 Under Home or Work, verify that the
following items are checked:
password to the folder, make the corresponding

Turn on network discovery, Turn on file and


settings for Permissions in Advanced Sharing of the 3 Use q/w to select a server, and then press
Sharing tab. ENTER.
printer sharing, Turn on sharing so anyone with Verify that Workgroup is properly set.
Tip
network access can read and write files in the Note
Public folders, and Turn off password protected The server name of your computer can be viewed on
When using NAS (Network Attached Storage), refer to the computer properties screen.
sharing. the instruction manual provided with your NAS unit.
4 Select Save changes and click OK on the 4 Use q/w to select the desired shared folder
confirmation screen. and then press ENTER.

5 When asked for a user name and password,


enter the necessary login information.
Tip
The login information will be remembered for the next
time you log in.
The login information is that of the user account set
when creating a shared folder.

6 Use q/w to select a music file and then press


ENTER or 1.
The playback of the selected file starts.

En-36
Playback

Remote Playback 5 Click OK to close the dialog box. 5 Adjusting the Volume.
This completes the Windows Media Player 12 You can adjust the volume by adjusting the
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home configuration. volume bar in the Remote playback window.
network ( pages 16, 27). You can now play the music files in your The default maximum volume level is 64. If you
Tip Windows Media Player 12 library. wish to change this, enter the value from the Web
Setup in your browser. Refer to step 3 of
The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is Tip
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN. Registering Other Internet Radio for details
On the Stream menu, confirm that Allow remote ( page 34).
Remote playback is supported by Windows Media control of my Player... is checked.
The volume value of the remote window and the
Player 12. volume value of the AV receiver may not always
Remote Playback means you can play the music files Using Remote Playback
match.
stored on a media server or personal computer with Adjustments you make to the volume in the AV
the AV receiver by operating the controller device in
the home network. 1 Turn on the AV receiver. receiver will not be reflected in the Remote
playback window.
Windows Media Player 12 Setup 2 Start Windows Media Player 12.
To enable remote playback, you must first
Note
This section explains how to configure Windows configure Windows Media Player 12.
Remote playback cannot be used in any of the following
Media Player 12 so that the AV receiver can play the
music files stored on your personal computer.
3 On Windows Media Player 12, right-click on a
music file.
cases:
Network services are being used.
The right-click menu appears. Contents are being played from a USB device.
1 Start Windows Media Player 12.
Tip
Agree is not selected on the DISCLAIMER screen
displayed on the TV when you select the NET input
For selecting another media server, select the desired selector on the AV receiver for the first time.
2 On the Stream menu, select Turn on media
streaming. media server from the Other Libraries menu on
Windows Media Player 12.
A dialog box appears.
Tip 4 Select the AV receiver in Remote playback.
The Play to window appears and playback on
If the media streaming is already activated, clicking on
the AV receiver starts. Operations during remote
More streaming options... in the Stream menu will
display a list of the playback devices connected to the
playback can be made from the Play to window
network. You can skip step 3. of Windows 8/Windows 7 on your personal
computer.
3 Move your cursor and click on Turn on media
streaming.
A playback screen will be displayed on the
connected TV.
A list of media server appears. Wording may vary
slightly depending on the network location. Tip
If the operating system of your personal computer is
4 On the Media streaming options, select the
AV receiver and confirm that it is set to
Windows 8, click Play to and select the AV receiver.

Allowed.

En-37
Playback
Tuning into stations by frequency
Listening to AM/FM Radio 2 Press TUNING q/w.
You can tune into AM and FM stations directly by
Searching stops when a station is found.
This section describes the procedure of using the entering the appropriate frequency.
buttons on the front panel, unless otherwise specified.
When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator
lights. When tuned into a stereo FM station, the 1 On the remote controller, press TUNER
repeatedly to select AM or FM, followed by
Using the Tuner
FM STEREO indicator lights as shown. D.TUN.
With the built-in tuner you can enjoy AM and FM radio
TUNED
stations. You can store your favorite stations as AUTO
presets for quick selection.
You can also change the frequency steps
( page 64).
(Actual display depends on the country.)
FM STEREO
1 Press TUNER to select either AM or FM. 2 Within 8 seconds, use the number buttons to
enter the frequency of the radio station.
In this example, FM has been selected. Tip
Each time you press TUNER, the radio band Tuning into weak FM stereo stations For example, to tune to 87.5 (FM), press 8, 7, 5
changes between AM and FM. If the signal from a stereo FM station is weak, it may or 8, 7, 5, 0.
be impossible to get good reception. In this case, If you have entered the wrong number, you can
Band Frequency
switch to manual tuning mode and listen to the station retry after 8 seconds.
in mono.
Presetting AM/FM Stations
You can store a combination of up to 40 of your
(Actual display depends on the country.) Manual tuning mode
favorite AM/FM radio stations as presets.
In manual tuning mode, FM stations will be in mono.
Tuning into Radio Stations
1 Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO 1 Tune into the AM/FM station that you want to
store as a preset.
indicator goes off on the AV receivers
Auto tuning mode See the previous section.
display.

1 Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO 2 Press and hold TUNING q/w. 2 Press MEMORY.
indicator lights on the AV receivers display. The preset number flashes.
The frequency stops changing when you release
the button.
Press the buttons repeatedly to change the
frequency one step at a time.

(Actual display depends on the country.)

3 While the preset number is flashing (about 8


seconds), use PRESET e/r to select a preset
from 1 through 40.

En-38
Playback
What is RDS? Displaying Radio Text (RT)
4 Press MEMORY again to store the station or
channel. RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a method
The station or channel is stored and the preset of transmitting data in FM radio signals. It was 1 Press RT/PTY/TP once.
number stops flashing. developed by the European Broadcasting Union The RT information scrolls across the AV
(EBU) and is available in most European countries. receivers display.
Repeat this procedure for all of your favorite
AM/FM radio stations. Many FM stations use it these days. In addition to Note
displaying text information, RDS can also help you
The message Waiting may appear while the AV
find radio stations by type (e.g., news, sport, rock, receiver waits for the RT information.
etc.). If the message No Text Data appears, no RT
Selecting Presets
information is available.
The AV receiver supports four types of RDS
1 To select a preset, use PRESET e/r on the AV
information:
receiver, or the remote controllers CH +/.
PS (Program Service) Finding Stations by Type (PTY)
Tip When tuned to an RDS station thats broadcasting PS
You can also use the remote controllers number information, the stations name will be displayed. You can search for radio stations by type.
buttons to select a preset directly. Pressing DISPLAY will display the frequency for 3
seconds. 1 Press RT/PTY/TP twice.
RT (Radio Text) The current program type appears on the AV
Deleting Presets When tuned to an RDS station thats broadcasting receivers display.
text information, the text will be shown on the AV
2 Use PRESET e/r to select the type of
1 Select the preset that you want to delete. receivers display. program you want.
See the previous section. PTY (Program Type) See the table shown later in this chapter.
This allows you to search for RDS radio stations by
2 While holding down MEMORY, press TUNING
MODE. type. 3 To start the search, press ENTER.
The AV receiver searches until it finds a station of
The preset is deleted and its number disappears TP (Traffic Program)
the type you specified, at which point it stops
from the AV receivers display. This allows you to search for RDS radio stations that briefly before continuing with the search.
broadcast traffic information ( page 40).
Using RDS (excluding North American and Note 4 When a station you want to listen to is found,
press ENTER.
Taiwanese models) RDS works only in areas where RDS broadcasts are If no stations are found, the message Not
available. Found appears.
When tuned into an RDS station, the RDS indicator
In some cases, the text characters displayed on the AV
lights. receiver may not be identical to those broadcast by the
When the station is broadcasting text information, the radio station. Also, unexpected characters may be
text can be displayed. displayed when unsupported characters are received. This
is not a malfunction.
If the signal from an RDS station is weak, RDS data may be
displayed intermittently or not at all.

En-39
Playback
Listening to Traffic News (TP) RDS program types (PTY)
Playing Audio and Video from Separate
You can search for stations that broadcast traffic Type Display Sources
news. None None
News reports News You can listen to the audio of one input source while
watching the video of another. This function takes
1 Press RT/PTY/TP three times. Current affairs Affairs
advantage of the fact that when an audio-only input
If the current radio station is broadcasting TP Information Info
(Traffic Program), [TP] will appear on the AV source (PHONO, TV/CD, TUNER) is selected, the
Sport Sport
receivers display. If TP without square brackets video input source remains unchanged. The following
Education Educate
appears, this means that the station is not procedure shows how to listen to a CD players audio
Drama Drama source connected to TV/CD IN while watching a Blu-
broadcasting TP. Culture Culture ray Disc/DVD players video source connected to
2 To locate a station that is broadcasting TP,
press ENTER.
Science and technology Science BD/DVD.
Varied Varied
Tip
The AV receiver searches until it finds a station Pop music Pop M
thats broadcasting TP. To use an input selector as audio-exclusive, you must
Rock music Rock M
assign all video inputs to - - - - - ( page 54).
If no stations are found, the message Not Middle of the road music Easy M
Found appears. Light classics
Serious classics
Light M
Classics
1 Press BD/DVD.

Other music Other M 2 Press TV/CD.


Weather Weather The audio output changes to the CD source, but
Finance Finance the video of previously-selected BD/DVD is
Childrens programmes Children
retained.
Social affairs Social 3 Start playback on your Blu-ray Disc/DVD and
CD players.
Religion Religion
Phone in Phone In You can now enjoy watching your Blu-ray
Travel Travel Disc/DVD with the sound of your CD player.
Leisure Leisure
Jazz music Jazz
Country music Country
National music Nation M
Oldies music Oldies
Folk music Folk M
Documentary Document
Alarm test TEST
Alarm Alarm!

En-40
Playback

(North American and Taiwanese models) PURE AUDIO button and indicator
Using the Listening Modes
(European, Australian and Asian models)
About Listening Modes This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode.
When this mode is selected, the AV receivers display
The AV receivers listening modes can transform your and analog video circuitry are turned off. Only video
listening room into a movie theater or concert hall, signals input through HDMI input can be output from
with high fidelity and stunning surround sound. the HDMI output. The indicator lights when this mode
is selected. Pressing this button again will select the
Selecting Listening Modes previous listening mode.
MOVIE/TV, MUSIC, GAME
Note
Listening Mode Buttons
(European, Australian and Asian models) The Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes can only be
selected if your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player is connected to the
Press RECEIVER first.
AV receiver with a digital audio connection (coaxial, optical,
or HDMI).
The listening modes you can select depends on the format
of the input signal. To check the format, see Displaying
Source Information ( page 45).
While a pair of headphones is connected, you can select
the following listening modes: Pure Audio (European,
Australian and Asian models), Mono, Direct, and Stereo.
PURE AUDIO MOVIE/TV, MUSIC, GAME

MOVIE/TV button
This button selects the listening modes intended for
use with movies and TV.
MUSIC button
This button selects the listening modes intended for
use with music.
MUSIC GAME GAME button
MOVIE/TV STEREO This button selects the listening modes intended for
use with video games.
STEREO button
This button selects the Stereo listening mode and All
Channel Stereo listening mode.

En-41
Playback
Input Source Onkyo-Original DSP Listening Modes
The following audio formats are supported by the listening modes. Listening Mode Description Input Speaker
This is mono (monophonic) sound. Source Layout
A
Orchestra Suitable for classical or operatic music, A CN
S This is stereo (stereophonic) sound. Two independent audio signal channels
this mode emphasizes the surround S
are reproduced through two speakers. Or ches t r a
channels in order to widen the stereo D
D This is 5.1-channel surround sound. This surround system has five main image, and simulates the natural
channels of sound and a sixth subwoofer channel (called the point-one F
reverberation of a large hall.
channel). G
Unplugged Suitable for acoustic instruments, vocals H
F This is 7.1-channel surround sound. This is a further sound enhancement to and jazz, this mode emphasizes the
5.1-channel sound with two additional speakers that provide greater sound Un p l u g g e d
front stereo image, giving the impression
envelopment and more accurate positioning of sounds. of being right in front of the stage.
G This is DTS-ES surround sound. This surround system can produce a discrete Studio-Mix Suitable for rock or pop music, listening
or a matrix-encoded sixth channel from existing DTS 5.1 encoded material. to music in this mode creates a lively
S t u d i o M i x
H This is Dolby Digital EX surround sound. This provides a center back surround sound field with a powerful acoustic
channel from 5.1-channel sources. image, like being at a club or rock
concert.
Speaker Layout TV Logic This mode adds realistic acoustics to TV
The illustration shows which speakers are activated in each channel. See shows produced in a TV studio,
TV Log i c
Speaker Configuration for the speaker setup ( page 55). surround effects to the entire sound, and
clarity to voices.
Z X C Game-RPG In this mode, the sound has a dramatic
feel with a similar atmosphere to
G ame RPG
Orchestra mode.
Game-Action In this mode, sound localization is
distinct with emphasis on bass.
G ame A c t i o n
Game-Rock In this mode, sound pressure is
emphasized to heighten live feel.
G ame R o c k
B V
Game-Sports Suitable for audio source with much
reverberation.
G ame S p o r t s
All Ch Stereo Ideal for background music, this mode XCN
fills the entire listening area with stereo
A l l Ch S t e r eo
sound from the front, surround, and
surround back speakers.
Full Mono In this mode, all speakers output the
same sound in mono, so the sound you
Fu l l Mo n o
hear is the same regardless of where
you are within the listening room.

En-42
Playback

Listening Mode Description Input Speaker Listening Mode Description Input Speaker
Source Layout Source Layout
T-D (Theater- With this mode you can enjoy a virtual A ZXC DSD*4 In this mode, audio from the input source D XCN
Dimensional) surround sound even with only two or S N is output without surround-sound
DSD
three speakers. This works by D processing. The speaker configuration
TD Dolby Digital
controlling how sounds reach the (presence of speakers), crossover
F
listeners left and right ears. Good frequency, speaker distance, A/V Sync
G Do l b y D
results may not be possible if theres too and much of the processing set via the
much reverb, so we recommend that H Dolby Digital Plus*5 audio setup are enabled. See On- D XCN
you use this mode in an environment Do l b y D +
screen Setup for more details F XCN*3
with little or no natural reverb. ( page 48).
Dolby TrueHD
Listening Modes Do l b y T r u e HD

Listening Mode Description Input Speaker DTS D XCN


Source Layout
DTS
Pure Audio*1*2 In this mode, the display and video A ZXC
DTS-HD High D XCN
circuitry are turned off, minimizing S N*3
Pu r eAAu d i o Resolution Audio
possible noise sources for the ultimate in D F XCN*3
high-fidelity audio reproduction. (As the D T S HD HR
F
analog video circuitry is turned off, only
G DTS-HD Master
video signals input through HDMI IN can
H Audio
be output from the HDMI output.)
Direct In this mode, audio from the input source D T S HD MS T R
is output without surround-sound DTS Express D XCN
D i r ec t
processing. The speaker configuration
(presence of speakers) and speaker DTS Exp r ess
distance settings are enabled, but much DTS 96/24*6 This mode is for use with DTS 96/24 D XCN
of the processing set via the audio setup sources. This is high-resolution DTS
is disabled. See On-screen Setup for DTS 96 / 24
with a 96 kHz sampling rate and 24-bit
more details ( page 48). resolution, providing superior fidelity.
Stereo Sound is output from the front left and ZXC Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS
right speakers and subwoofer. N 96/24 logo.
S t e r eo
DTS-ES Discrete*7 This mode is for use with DTS-ES G V
Mono Use this mode when watching an old Discrete soundtracks, which use a
movie with a mono soundtrack, or use it ES D i sc r e t e
discrete surround back channel for true
Mo n o
with the foreign language soundtracks 6.1/7.1-channel playback. The seven
recorded in the left and right channels of totally separate audio channels provide
some movies. It can also be used with better spatial imaging and 360-degree
DVDs or other sources containing sound localization, perfect for sounds
multiplexed audio, such as karaoke that pan across the surround channels.
DVDs. Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS-ES
Multichannel This mode is for use with PCM D XCN logo, especially those with a DTS-ES
multichannel sources. F Discrete soundtrack.
Mu l t i c h

En-43
Playback

Listening Mode Description Input Speaker Listening Mode Description Input Speaker
Source Layout Source Layout
DTS-ES Matrix*7 This mode is for use with DTS-ES Matrix G V Dolby Pro Logic IIz Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height is designed S B
soundtracks, which use a matrix- Height to more effectively use existing program D
ES Ma t r i x
encoded back-channel for 6.1/7.1- material when height channel speaker F
PL z He i g h t
channel playback. Use it with DVDs that outputs are present. Dolby Pro Logic
G
bear the DTS-ES logo, especially those IIz Height can be used to upmix a
H
with a DTS-ES Matrix soundtrack. variety of sources from movies and
Dolby Pro Logic IIx*8 Dolby Pro Logic IIx expands any 2- music, but are particularly well-suited to
Dolby Pro Logic II channel source for 7.1-channel upmix game content.
playback. It provides a very natural and Dolby EX These modes expand 5.1-channel D V
PL Mo v i e
seamless surround-sound experience sources for 6.1/7.1-channel playback. H
Do l b y EX
that fully envelops the listener. As well Theyre especially suited to Dolby EX
PL Mu s i c
as music and movies, video games can soundtracks that include a matrix-
Do l b y D EX
also benefit from the dramatic spatial encoded surround back channel. The
PL Game
effects and vivid imaging. additional channel adds an extra
If youre not using any surround back S XCN dimension and provides an enveloping
PL x Mo v i e
speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II will be surround sound experience, perfect for
used instead of Dolby Pro Logic IIx. rotating and fly-by sound effects.
PL x Mu s i c
Dolby PLIIx Movie DTS Neo:6 This mode expands any 2-channel
PL x Game Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby source for up to 7.1-channel playback. It
Surround (Pro Logic) movie (e.g., TV, uses seven full-bandwidth channels of
DVD, VHS). matrix decoding for matrix-encoded
Dolby PLIIx Music material, providing a very natural and
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby seamless surround sound experience
Surround (Pro Logic) music source that fully envelops the listener.
(e.g., CD, radio, cassette, TV, VHS, DTS Neo:6 Cinema S XCN
Ne o : 6 C i n ema
DVD). Use this mode with any stereo movie
Dolby PLIIx Game (e.g., TV, DVD, VHS).
Ne o : 6 Mu s i c
Use this mode with video games, DTS Neo:6 Music
especially those that bear the Dolby Use this mode with any stereo music
Pro Logic II logo. source (e.g., CD, radio, cassette, TV,
Dolby PLIIx Movie VHS, DVD).
D V
Dolby PLIIx Music DTS Neo:6 D V
Ne o : 6
These modes use the Dolby Pro Logic This mode uses DTS Neo:6 to expand
IIx modes to expand 5.1-channel 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-
sources for 7.1-channel playback. channel playback.

En-44
Playback

Note Displaying Source Information Using the Sleep Timer


*1 (North American and Taiwanese models) This
listening mode is not available. You can display various information about the current With the sleep timer, you can set the AV receiver to
*2 Pure Audio cannot be selected when Zone 2 is active. input source as follows. turn off automatically after a specified period.
Besides, if you activate Zone 2 while Pure Audio is
selected, the listening mode will automatically switch to
Direct.
1 Press RECEIVER once followed by DISPLAY
repeatedly to cycle through the available
1 Press RECEIVER once followed by SLEEP
repeatedly to select the required sleep time.
*3 Based on the audio channel signal contained in the information. The sleep time can be set from 90 to 10 minutes
source, the corresponding speakers will output the in 10 minute steps.
sound. Tip
The SLEEP indicator lights on the AV receivers
*4 The AV receiver can input the DSD signal from HDMI IN. Alternatively, you can use DISPLAY on the AV
Depending on the player, setting the output on the player receiver. display when the sleep timer has been set. The
side to PCM might bring better sound. specified sleep time appears for about 5
*5 For the Blu-ray Discs, Dolby Digital is used in a 3.1/5.1- The following information can be typically displayed. seconds, then the previous display reappears.
channel speaker system. Tip
*6 DTS is used depending on the configuration of the AV Input source & If you need to cancel the sleep timer, press SLEEP
receiver. volume*1
*7 If there are no surround back speakers, DTS is used. repeatedly until the SLEEP indicator goes off.
*8 To check the time remaining until the AV receiver
If there are no surround back speakers, Dolby Pro Logic
sleeps, press SLEEP. Note that if you press again on
II is used.
Listening mode SLEEP as the time being displayed is 10 minutes or
less, the sleep timer will go off.
The listening mode may not be selected depending
on the input signal. The signal input from the
external AV components can be displayed by the Signal format*2
function as follows.
Sampling
frequency*2

Input signal
resolution

Output resolution

*1 When AM or FM radio is used, the band, preset number,


and frequency are displayed.
*2 If the input signal is digital, the signal format is displayed.
Information is displayed for about three seconds, then
the previously displayed information reappears.

En-45
Playback

Setting the Display Brightness Muting the AV Receiver


You can adjust the brightness of the AV receivers You can temporarily mute the output of the AV
display. receiver.

1 Press RECEIVER once followed by DIMMER


repeatedly to switch between: normal, dim, or
1 Press RECEIVER followed by MUTING.
The output is muted and the MUTING indicator
dimmer brightness. flashes on the AV receivers display.
Tip Tip
(North American and Taiwanese models) To unmute, press MUTING again or adjust the volume.
Alternatively, you can use DIMMER on the AV Muting is automatically cancelled when the AV
receiver. receiver is set to standby.

Changing the Input Display


When you connect an u-capable Onkyo
component, you must configure the input display so
that u can work properly.
This setting can be done only from the front panel.

1 Press TV/CD or GAME.


TV/CD or GAME appears on the AV receivers
display.

2 Press and hold down the same button (about


3 seconds) to change the input display.
Repeat this step to select the desired input
display.
TV/CD: TV/CD DOCK


TAPE

GAME: GAME DOCK


Note
DOCK can be selected for the TV/CD or GAME
input selector, but not at the same time.
Enter the appropriate remote control code before using
the remote controller for the first time ( page 72).

En-46
Playback
connected through HDMI, you can easily switch a short while after the AV receiver is turned on.
Using the Home Menu
between inputs as their previews are displayed on Please wait until it becomes operable.
The Home menu provides quick access to frequently a single screen. Press ENTER to display the network service
used menus. Press ENTER to display the main preview screen. If you want to use the Internet radio
(currently selected HDMI input) and the services, use q/w/e/r to select the desired
Tip
additional previews (other HDMI inputs). Using service. Pressing ENTER again switches to that
The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is q/w or e/r to select a preview thumbnail and selection. If you want to play music files on a
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN.
pressing ENTER will switch the AV receiver to computer or media server, use q/w/e/r to
that input source. select DLNA and then press ENTER. If you
1 Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.
want to play music files on a computer or NAS
The Home menu will be superimposed on the TV Tip
screen. (Network Attached Storage), use q/w/e/r to
If no video signals are present, the thumbnails will be select Home Media and then press ENTER.
Tip filled in black.
Alternatively, you can use HOME on the AV receiver.
You can specify the number of preview thumbnails as USB
well as their positioning on screen ( page 66). `With this selection, you can play contents of
Note portable players and USB storage devices
This function cannot be selected when: connected to the AV receivers USB port
HDMI IN 6 is the current HDMI input source, or ( page 32). Note that this selection will be
No signal is present on the current input source. grayed out for a short while after the AV receiver
Depending on video signals, the picture may not be is turned on. Please wait until it becomes
properly rendered on the preview thumbnails of operable.
InstaPrevue. Press ENTER to select a drive or browse the
contents of the media connected, followed by
2 Use e/r or q/w and ENTER to make the Firmware Update
q/w to select the desired folder or track.
desired selection. ` With this selection, you can update the firmware
Press HOME to close the menu. Pressing ENTER as a track is selected will start
of the AV receiver. Note that this selection will be
playback.
grayed out for a short while after the AV receiver
Setup is turned on. Please wait until it becomes
` With this selection, you can access the common operable.
settings of the on-screen Setup menu. Press ENTER to start the procedure
Press ENTER to display the Setup menu ( page 85).
( page 52).
Network Service
Tip You need to connect the AV receiver to your home
You can also access frequently used settings from Quick network ( page 16, 27).
Setup ( page 48). ` With this selection, you can use various Internet
radio services or play the contents stored in media
InstaPrevue connected to your home network ( pages 32 to
` With this selection, you can preview audio/video 36). Note that this selection will be grayed out for
streams coming from HDMI inputs (HDMI
IN 1/2/3/4/5). Even with multiple components

En-47
Advanced Operations
In addition, previews of the video streams coming
Using the Quick Setup
from HDMI inputs (HDMI IN 1/2/3/4/5) are
displayed.*2
Use q/w to select an input source and view the
related information. Pressing ENTER switches to
Advanced Operations the selected input source.
RECEIVER Audio ( page 49)
`You can change the following settings: Bass,
Treble, Phase Matching Bass, Subwoofer
Level, Center Level, Audyssey,
ENTER,
q/w/e/r Dynamic EQ, Dynamic Volume, Late
Night, Music Optimizer and Cinema Filter.
On-screen Setup Q SETUP RETURN Video*3
`You can change the following settings: Wide
This section describes the procedure for using the
Mode and Picture Mode*4.
remote controller unless otherwise specified.
See also:
With the AV receiver connected to a TV, there are two 1 Press RECEIVER followed by Q SETUP.
Picture Adjust ( page 61)
The Quick Setup will be superimposed on the TV
ways of changing the settings on-screen: using the
screen. Information*5
Quick Setup or the Setup Menu (HOME).
`You can view the information of the following
Quick Setup items: Audio, Video and Tuner.
The Quick Setup provides quick access to frequently
used settings. You can change settings and view the Listening Mode*6
BD/DVD
current information. Input `You can select the listening modes that are
Audio
Video grouped in the following categories: MOVIE/TV,
Setup menu (HOME) Information
MUSIC, GAME.
Listening Mode
The Setup menu (HOME) provides a convenient way Use q/w to select the category and e/r to
to change the AV receivers various settings. Settings select the listening mode. Press ENTER to
are organized into 9 categories. 2 Use q/w and ENTER to make the desired switch to the selected listening mode.
Tip
selection.
Note
Press Q SETUP to close the menu.
The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is *1 BLUETOOTH cannot be selected, if youve selected
Press RETURN to return to the previous menu. NET or USB as input selector in Zone 2.
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN.
*2 The video preview is not displayed when:
Input*1 HDMI IN 6 is the current HDMI input source, or
` You can select input sources and view the No signal is present on the current input source.
following information: the name of input selectors, The video of the currently-selected input is displayed on
input assignments, the name of the device paired the main screen, not on a preview thumbnail.
*3 When the Monitor Out setting is set to Sub, Video
with the AV receiver via Bluetooth, radio
information, and ARC function setting. cannot be selected ( page 53).

En-48
Advanced Operations
This setting cannot be used with the NET, USB and
Using the Audio Settings of Quick Phase Matching Bass
BLUETOOTH input selectors.
*4 Only when you have selected Custom in the Picture Setup Phase Matching Bass
Mode ( page 61), pressing ENTER allows you to
adjust the following items via the Quick Setup: You can change various audio settings from the `Off
Brightness, Contrast, Hue and Saturation. Press Quick Setup ( page 48). `On
RETURN to return to the Picture Mode setting.
Note
From the warm low notes produced by a cello to the
*5 Depending on the input source and listening mode, not deep frequencies of electronic music, a good audio
all channels shown here output the sound. These settings are not available in either of the following
system should be able to deliver plenty of bass
*6 This setting is not available in either of the following cases:
The Audio TV Out (Main) setting is set to On resonance.
cases:
( page 65) or Audio TV Out (Sub) setting is set to While traditional enhancement systems effectively
The Audio TV Out (Main) setting is set to On
( page 65) or Audio TV Out (Sub) setting is set to On ( page 65) and youre listening through your TV boost low-frequency sound, they are often prone to
On ( page 65) and youre listening through your TV speakers. the effects of phase shifting, which can overwhelm
speakers. HDMI CEC (RIHD) is set to On ( page 64) and mid-range frequencies and muddy the sound. Our
HDMI CEC (RIHD) is set to On ( page 64) and youre listening through your TV speakers. Phase-Matching Bass Boost technology effectively
youre listening through your TV speakers. preserves mid-range clarity-allowing vocals and
Tone Control strings to shine-while maintaining a smooth, powerful
Explanatory Notes bass response at all volume levels.
Bass
Note
a Phase Matching Bass ` 10dB to 0dB to +10dB in 2 dB steps.
b `Off You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds The Phase Matching Bass is disabled when the Direct or
Pure Audio (European, Australian and Asian models)
`On output from the front speakers.
listening mode is selected.
a Setting target Treble If the Subwoofer setting is set to No, this setting is fixed
` 10dB to 0dB to +10dB in 2 dB steps. to Off.
b Setting options (default setting underlined)
You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds
output from the front speakers. Operating on the AV receiver
You can adjust the bass and treble for the front
speakers, except when Direct or Pure Audio 1 Press TONE repeatedly to select PM Bass.
(European, Australian and Asian models) listening
mode is selected. 2 Use and + to change the setting.

Operating on the AV receiver

1 Press TONE repeatedly to select either Bass


or Treble.

2 Use and + to adjust.

Operating
procedure
En-49 ( page 48)
Advanced Operations
Speaker Levels The setting is stored individually for each input selector. Music Optimizer

Subwoofer Level Late Night Music Optimizer


` 15dB to 0dB to +12dB in 1 dB steps. `Off
Late Night `On
Center Level For Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus sources, The Music Optimizer function enhances the sound
` 12dB to 0dB to +12dB in 1 dB steps. the options are: quality of compressed music files. When set to On,
You can adjust the volume of each speaker while ` Off the M.Opt indicator lights on the AV receivers
listening to an input source. ` Low: display.
These temporary adjustments are cancelled when the Small reduction in dynamic range.
AV receiver is set to standby. To save the setting you Tip
` High:
made here, go to Level Calibration ( page 57) Large reduction in dynamic range. (North American and Taiwanese models) Alternatively,
before setting the AV receiver to standby. you can use MUSIC OPTIMIZER on the AV receiver.
For Dolby TrueHD sources, the options are:
Note Note
` Auto:
You cannot use these function while the AV receiver is The Music Optimizer function only works with PCM digital
The Late Night function is set to On or Off
muted. audio input signals with a sampling rate below 48 kHz and
automatically. analog audio input signals.
These settings cannot be used while a pair of headphones
is connected.
` Off When NET or USB input selector is selected, this function
Speakers that are set to No or None in ` On even works with digital audio input signals with a sampling
Speaker Configuration ( page 55) cannot be adjusted. Turn this setting on to reduce the dynamic range of rate below 48 kHz (except DSD signals and Dolby TrueHD
Dolby Digital material so that you can still hear quiet signals) regardless of the PCM digital audio input signals
with a sampling rate below 48 kHz.
Audyssey parts even when listening at low volume levelsideal
The Music Optimizer is disabled when the Direct or Pure
for watching movies late at night when you dont want
Audio (European, Australian and Asian models)
Audyssey to disturb anyone. listening mode is selected.
See Audyssey in 4. Source Setup ( page 58). Note The setting is stored individually for each input selector.

Dynamic EQ The effect of the Late Night function depends on the


See Dynamic EQ in 4. Source Setup ( page 59). material that you are playing and the intention of the original
sound designer, and with some material there will be little
Dynamic Volume or no effect when you select the different options.
See Dynamic Volume in 4. Source Setup The Late Night function can be used only when the input
( page 59). source is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, or Dolby
TrueHD.
Note The Late Night function is set to Off when the AV receiver
These technologies can be used when all the following is set to standby. For Dolby TrueHD sources, it will be set
conditions are met: to Auto.
Room Correction and Speaker Setup is completed. Note With Dolby TrueHD sources, the Late Night function cannot
that Audyssey requires the Audyssey MultEQ Full be used when TrueHD Loudness Management is set to
Calibration method. Off.
Any listening mode other than Direct or Pure Audio
(European, Australian and Asian models) is selected.
A pair of headphones is not connected.

Operating
procedure
En-50 ( page 48)
Advanced Operations
CinemaFILTER

Cinema Filter
` Off
` On
Turn this setting on to soften overly bright movie
soundtracks, which are typically mixed for
reproduction in a movie theater.
CinemaFILTER can be used with the following
listening modes: Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX,
Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Movie, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIz
Height, Multichannel, DTS, DTS-ES, DTS Neo:6
Cinema, DTS 96/24, DTS Neo:6, DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio, DTS-HD Master Audio and DTS
Express.
Note
The CinemaFILTER may not work when used with certain
input sources.

Operating
procedure
En-51 ( page 48)
Advanced Operations

Using the Setup Menu (HOME) Setup Menu Items Main menu item Sub menu item
7. Hardware Setup Tuner
( page 64) HDMI
Main menu item Sub menu item
Remote Auto Standby
1. Input/Output Assign Monitor Out
indicator
( page 53) HDMI Input Network
Component Video Input Initial Setup
RECEIVER Digital Audio Input 8. Remote Controller Remote ID
Setup Remote Mode Setup
2. Speaker Setup Speaker Settings
( page 68)
( page 55) Speaker Configuration
9. Lock Setup Setup
ENTER, Speaker Distance ( page 68)
q/w/e/r Level Calibration
3. Audio Adjust Multiplex/Mono
RETURN ( page 57) Dolby
HOME DTS
Theater-Dimensional

1 Press RECEIVER followed by HOME. 4. Source Setup


( page 58)
Audyssey
IntelliVolume
2 Use e/r or q/w to select Setup, and then A/V Sync
press ENTER. Name Edit

3 Use q/w to select a main menu item, and then Picture Adjust
press ENTER. Audio Selector
5. Listening Mode Preset BD/DVD
4 Use q/w to select a sub menu item, and then
( page 63) CBL/SAT
press ENTER.
GAME
5 Use q/w to select a setting target, and use e/r PC
to change the setting.
AUX
Press HOME to close the menu.
TUNER
Press RETURN to return to the previous menu.
TV/CD
PHONO
Note NET
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver USB
by using HOME, the cursor buttons, and ENTER.
BLUETOOTH
During Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker
Setup, messages, etc., that are displayed on the TV screen 6. Miscellaneous Volume Setup
( page 63) OSD Setup
will appear on the AV receivers display.

En-52
Advanced Operations
Explanatory Notes 1. Input/Output Assign Note
The HDMI Through setting is only available for the HDMI
a 2. Speaker Setup Monitor Out OUT MAIN jack ( page 65).

b Speaker Configuration On the Monitor Out settings, you can select Resolution
whether or not to have the video sources images `Through:
c Subwoofer output through the HDMI output. Select this to pass video through the AV receiver
`Yes If you connect your TV to HDMI output, Monitor Out at the same resolution and with no conversion.
d
`No setting is automatically set and composite video and `Auto:
component video sources are upconverted* and Select this to have the AV receiver automatically
a Main Menu output. convert video at resolutions supported by your
b Sub Menu TV.
Composite video,
c Setting target component video HDMI
`480p (480p/576p), 720p, 1080i, 1080p*1:
Select the desired output resolution.
d Setting options (default setting underlined) IN
`4K:
Select this for an output resolution four times
that of 1080p. Depending on the resolution
OUT supported by your TV, it will result in either 3840
Composite video, HDMI
2160 or 4096 2160 pixels.
component video You can specify the output resolution for HDMI OUT
MAIN and have the AV receiver upconvert the picture
Note resolution as necessary to match the resolution
See The video and audio signal flow ( page 17) for supported by your TV.
Sub Menu charts showing how the Monitor Out and Resolution
Tip
settings affect the video signal flow through the AV
Main Menu receiver. You can see the picture by pressing ENTER to check the
Resolution setting for HDMI OUT MAIN (excluding NET,
Monitor Out USB and BLUETOOTH input source).
` Main: Note
Select this if your TV is connected to HDMI OUT
With some TVs, video signals are processed in the same
MAIN. way as Through when this setting is set to 4K.
` Sub: If the Monitor Out setting is set to Sub, this setting is
Select this if your TV is connected to HDMI OUT fixed to Through.
SUB. If the Monitor Out setting is set to Both, this setting is
` Both: fixed to Auto.
*1 When signal is 1080p input at 24 frames per second, it
Select this if your TVs are connected to HDMI
will be 1080p output at 24 frames per second.
OUT MAIN and HDMI OUT SUB. Video signals
are output from both HDMI outputs at the
resolution supported by both TVs.

Operating
procedure
En-53 ( page 52)
Advanced Operations
HDMI Input BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, GAME, PC, AUX, TV/CD, Component Video Input
PHONO
If you connect a video component to an HDMI input, ` HDMI1/MHL, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4, HDMI5, If you connect a video component to a component
you must assign that input to an input selector. For HDMI6: video input, you must assign that input to an input
example, if you connect your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player Select the input to which the component has selector. For example, if you connect your Blu-ray
to HDMI IN 1, you must assign HDMI1/MHL to the been connected. Disc/DVD player to COMPONENT VIDEO IN, you
BD/DVD input selector. must assign IN1 to the BD/DVD input selector.
` - - - - -:
If youve connected your TV to the AV receiver with Output composite video and component video Here are the default assignments.
an HDMI cable, composite video and component sources from the HDMI output. The video output Input selector Default assignment
video sources can be upconverted* and output by the signal from the HDMI output is the one BD/DVD -----
HDMI output. You can set this for each input selector configured in Component Video Input. CBL/SAT IN1
by selecting the - - - - - option. See The video and
Each HDMI input cannot be assigned to two input GAME -----
audio signal flow for more information on video
selectors or more. When HDMI1 - HDMI6 have PC -----
signal flow and upconversion ( page 17).
already been assigned, you must first set any AUX -----
Composite video, unused input selectors to - - - - - or you will be
TV/CD -----
component video HDMI unable to assign HDMI1 - HDMI6 to other input
PHONO -----
IN selectors.
Note BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, GAME, PC, AUX, TV/CD,
If no video component is connected to the HDMI input (even PHONO
OUT if the HDMI input is assigned), the AV receiver selects the `IN1:
video source based on the setting of Component Video Select the input to which the component has
Composite video, HDMI
Input. been connected.
component video
When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector as `- - - - -:
Here are the default assignments. explained here, the same HDMI IN will be set as a priority
Output composite video sources from the HDMI
in the Digital Audio Input. In this case, if you want to use
Input selector Default assignment output.
the coaxial or optical audio input, make the appropriate
BD/DVD HDMI2 selection in the Audio Selector setting ( page 62). Note
CBL/SAT HDMI3 Do not assign an HDMI IN to the TV/CD selector while When composite video and component video sources are
GAME HDMI4 HDMI CEC (RIHD) is set to On ( page 64), otherwise upconverted for HDMI OUT SUB, only signals with a
appropriate CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) operation resolution of 480i/576i are output and the resolution
PC HDMI5
will not be guaranteed. remains the same. If your TV doesnt support this
AUX HDMI1/MHL If you assign - - - - - to an input selector that is currently resolution, there will be no picture ( page 84).
TV/CD ----- selected in HDMI Through ( page 65), the HDMI
PHONO ----- Through setting will be automatically switched to Off.
In order for the AV receiver to upconvert component input
to HDMI output, the source output must be set to 480i/576i.
When signal is input at resolution of 480p/576p and more,
error message will be displayed.

Operating
procedure
En-54 ( page 52)
Advanced Operations
Digital Audio Input `6ohms:
2. Speaker Setup
Select if the impedances of all speakers are
If you connect a component to a digital audio input, between 6 and 16 ohms.
Here you can check the settings made by
you must assign that input to an input selector. For
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Note
example, if you connect your CD player to the
Setup function, or set them manually, which is useful (North American and Taiwanese models) Speakers with
COAXIAL IN 1, you must assign COAXIAL1 to the
if you change one of the connected speakers after an impedance of less than 6 ohms are not supported.
TV/CD input selector.
using Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and
Here are the default assignments. Speaker Setup function ( page 24). Speakers Type (Front)
Input selector Default assignment `Normal:
Note
BD/DVD COAXIAL1 Select this if youve connected your front
These settings are not available in either of the following speakers normally.
CBL/SAT COAXIAL2 cases:
GAME ----- `Bi-Amp:
a pair of headphones is connected.
The Audio TV Out (Main) setting is set to On
Select this if youve bi-amped your front
PC -----
( page 65) or Audio TV Out (Sub) setting is set to speakers.
AUX -----
On ( page 65) and youre listening through your TV Powered Zone 2
TV/CD OPTICAL
speakers.
PHONO ----- HDMI CEC (RIHD) is set to On ( page 64) and
`No
youre listening through your TV speakers. `Yes:
BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, GAME, PC, AUX, TV/CD, Zone 2 speakers can be used (Powered Zone 2
PHONO Speaker Settings enabled).
` COAXIAL1, COAXIAL2, OPTICAL:
Note
Select the input to which the component has If you change these settings, you must run
been connected. If the Speakers Type (Front) setting is set to Bi-Amp,
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Powered Zone 2 cannot be used.
` - - - - -: Setup again ( page 24). When the Powered Zone 2 setting is set to Yes and
Select if the component is connected to an Zone 2 is turned on, the surround back and front high
analog audio input. If you bi-amp the front speakers, you must change the speakers cannot be used.
Note
Speakers Type (Front) setting. For details on
speaker wire connection, see Bi-amping the Front Speaker Configuration
When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector in
Speakers ( page 14).
HDMI Input ( page 54), the same HDMI IN will be set
as a priority in this assignment. In this case, if you want to Note
use the coaxial or optical audio input, make the appropriate This setting is set automatically by
When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to drive up Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker
selection in the Audio Selector ( page 62).
to 5.1 speakers in the main room. Setup function ( page 24).
Supported sampling rates for PCM signals (stereo/mono)
Before you change these settings, turn down the volume.
from a digital input (optical and coaxial) are
32/44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz/16, 20, 24 bit. Speaker Impedance With these settings, you can specify which speakers
(European, Australian and Asian models) are connected and a crossover frequency for each
` 4ohms: speaker. Specify Full Band for speakers that can
Select if the impedance of any speaker is 4 output low frequency bass sounds adequately, for
ohms or more but less than 6. example, speakers with a good sized woofer. For
smaller speakers, specify a crossover frequency.
Sounds below the crossover frequency will be output

Operating
procedure
En-55 ( page 52)
Advanced Operations
by the subwoofer instead of the speaker. Refer to Surround Back Ch Speaker Distance
your speakers manuals to determine the optimum ` 1ch:
crossover frequencies. Select if only one surround back speaker L is
connected. This setting is set automatically by
Subwoofer
` 2ch: Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker
` Yes Setup function ( page 24).
Select if two (left and right) surround back
` No
speakers are connected.
Here you can specify the distance from each speaker
Front Note to the listening position so that the sound from each
` Full Band If the Surround Back setting is set to None, this setting speaker arrives at the listeners ears as the sound
` 40Hz to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz, 200Hz cannot be selected. designer intended.
Note LPF of LFE Unit
If the Subwoofer setting is set to No, the Front setting (Low-Pass Filter for the LFE Channel) `feet:
is fixed at Full Band. ` 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz Distances can be set in feet. Range: 1.0ft to
Center*1, Surround*1 ` Off: 30.0ft in 1.0 foot steps.
` Full Band Low-Pass Filter is not applied. `meters:
` 40Hz to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz, 200Hz With this setting, you can specify the cutoff Distances can be set in meters. Range: 0.30m
` None frequency of the LFE channels low-pass filter to 9.00m in 0.30 meter steps.
(LPF), which can be used to filter out unwanted (The default setting varies from country to country.)
Front High*1*2*3*5 hum. The LPF only applies to sources that use the
` Full Band LFE channel. Left, Front High Left, Center, Front High Right,
` 40Hz to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz, 200Hz Right, Surround Right, Surround Back Right,
Double Bass Surround Back Left, Surround Left, Subwoofer
` None
`Specify the distance from each speaker to your
Surround Back*1*2*3*4 This setting is NOT set automatically by listening position.
` Full Band Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Note
` 40Hz to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz, 200Hz Setup function ( page 24).
Speakers that you set to No or None in
` None Speaker Configuration cannot be selected ( page 55).
` On
Note When the Powered Zone 2 setting is set to Yes and
` Off Zone 2 is turned on, the surround back and front high
*1 Full Band can be selected only when Full Band is
Turn this setting on to boost bass output by feeding speakers cannot be used.
selected in the Front setting.
*2 If the Surround setting is set to None, this setting bass sounds from the front left, right, and center
cannot be selected. channels to the subwoofer. Default setting: - - - -
*3 If the Speakers Type (Front) setting is set to Note
Bi-Amp, or the Powered Zone 2 setting is set to
When the Subwoofer setting is set to No or the Front
Yes together with Zone 2 turned on, this setting cannot
setting to anything other than Full Band, this setting is
be selected.
*4
fixed to - - -.
If anything else than None is selected in Front High,
This setting is set to On automatically when the
this setting is automatically set to None.
*5
Subwoofer and Front settings are set for the first time
If anything else than None is selected in Surround
to Yes and Full Band respectively.
Back, this setting is automatically set to None.

Operating
procedure
En-56 ( page 52)
Advanced Operations
Level Calibration 3. Audio Adjust With this setting, you can broaden the width of the
front stereo image when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx
With the Audio Adjust functions and settings, you can Music listening mode.
This setting is set automatically by adjust the sound and listening modes as you like. Dimension
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker `3 to 0 to +3
Setup function ( page 24). Multiplex/Mono With this setting, you can move the sound field
Here you can adjust the level of each speaker with forward or backward when using the Dolby Pro Logic
Multiplex IIx Music listening mode. Higher settings move the
the built-in test tone so that the volume of each
speaker is the same at the listening position. Input Channel sound field backward. Lower settings move it forward.
` Main If the stereo image feels too wide, or theres too much
Left, Front High Left, Center*1, Front High Right, ` Sub surround sound, move the sound field forward to
Right, Surround Right, Surround Back Right, improve the balance. Conversely, if the stereo image
` Main/Sub
Surround Back Left, Surround Left feels like its in mono, or theres not enough surround
This setting determines which channel of a stereo
` 12dB to 0dB to +12dB in 1 dB steps. sound, move it backward.
multiplex source is output. Use it to select audio
Subwoofer*1 channels or languages with multiplex sources, Center Width
` 15dB to 0dB to +12dB in 1 dB steps. multilingual TV broadcasts, and so on. `0 to 3 to 7
With this setting, you can adjust the width of the
Note Mono
sound from the center speaker when using the Dolby
These settings cannot be calibrated when the AV receiver Input Channel Pro Logic IIx Music listening mode. Normally, if youre
is muted. ` Left + Right
Speakers that you set to No or None in
using a center speaker, the center channel sound is
` Left output from only the center speaker. (If youre not
Speaker Configuration cannot be selected ( page 55).
When the Powered Zone 2 setting is set to Yes and ` Right using a center speaker, the center channel sound will
Zone 2 is turned on, the surround back and front high This setting specifies the channel to be used for be distributed to the front left and right speakers to
speakers cannot be used. playing any 2-channel digital source such as Dolby create a phantom center.) This setting controls the
*1 For the center speaker and subwoofer, the level settings Digital, or 2-channel analog/PCM source in the Mono front left, right, and center mix, allowing you to adjust
made by using the Quick Setup are saved in this menu listening mode. the weight of the center channel sound.
( page 50).
PL IIz Height Gain
Tip Dolby
`Low
If youre using a handheld sound level meter, adjust the
PL IIx Music (2ch Input) `Mid
level of each speaker so that it reads 75 dB SPL at the
listening position, measured with C-weighting and slow These settings apply to only 2-channel stereo `High
reading. sources. The Height Gain Control in Dolby Pro Logic IIz
If youre not using any surround back speakers, these enables the listener to select how much gain is
settings apply to Dolby Pro Logic II, not Dolby Pro applied to the front high speakers. There are three
Logic IIx. settings, Low, Mid and High, and the front high
speakers are accentuated in that order. While Mid is
Panorama the default listening setting, the listener may adjust
` On the Height Gain Control to their personal preference.
` Off

Operating
procedure
En-57 ( page 52)
Advanced Operations

Note DTS Note


If the Front High settings is set to None ( page 56), For best results, we recommend setting Narrow to 20
this setting cannot be selected. Neo:6 Music and Wide to 40.
If the Powered Zone 2 setting is set to Yes and Zone 2 Center Image
is turned on, this setting cannot be selected. ` 0 to 2 to 5 4. Source Setup
Dolby EX The DTS Neo:6 Music listening mode creates 6-
` Auto: channel surround sound from 2-channel stereo Items can be set individually for each input selector.
If the source signal contains a Dolby EX flag, the sources. With this setting, you can specify by how Press the input selector buttons to select an input
Dolby EX listening mode is used. much the front left and right channel output is source.
` Manual: attenuated in order to create the center channel.
You can select any available listening mode. Changing the value from 0 to 5 will spread the Audyssey
This setting determines how Dolby EX encoded sound of the center channel to left and right
The tone for each speaker is set automatically by
signals are handled. This setting is unavailable if no (outwards).
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker
surround back speakers are connected. This setting Setup. To enable the following settings, you must first
is effective with Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus and Theater-Dimensional
perform the Room Correction and Speaker Setup
Dolby TrueHD only. ( page 24).
Listening Angle
Note These technologies cannot be used when a pair of
` Wide:
If the Surround Back setting is set to None headphones is connected.
Select if the listening angle is greater than 30
( page 56), this setting cannot be selected. degrees. Audyssey
If the Powered Zone 2 setting is set to Yes and Zone 2
is turned on, this setting cannot be selected.
` Narrow: `Off
If the Front High setting is enabled ( page 56), this Select if the listening angle is less than 30 `Movie:
setting is fixed to Manual. degrees. Select this setting for movie material.
With this setting, you can optimize the Theater- The Audyssey indicator will light.
TrueHD Loudness Management Dimensional listening mode by specifying the angle of `Music:
` Off the front left and right speakers relative to the Select this setting for music material.
` On listening position. Ideally, the front left and right The Audyssey indicator will light.
This setting specifies whether or not to apply the Late speakers should be equidistant from the listening
Note
Night processing on a Dolby TrueHD source. position and at an angle close to one of the two
available settings. When Audyssey Quick Start has been used for
Note measurement, Audyssey cannot be selected.
When this setting is set to Off, the Late Night function for Audyssey equalizing does not work with DSD sources.
Front left speaker Front right speaker
Dolby TrueHD sources is automatically fixed to Off.

Listening angle: 30

Operating
procedure
En-58 ( page 52)
Advanced Operations
Dynamic EQ play at reference level when the master volume About Audyssey Dynamic EQ
` Off control is set to the 64 position. At that level you can Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of
` On: hear the mix as the mixers heard it. deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by
Audyssey Dynamic EQ becomes active. Audyssey Dynamic EQ is referenced to the standard taking into account human perception and room
The Dynamic EQ indicator will light. film mix level. It makes adjustments to maintain the acoustics. Dynamic EQ selects the correct frequency
With Audyssey Dynamic EQ, you can enjoy great reference response and surround envelopment when response and surround levels moment-by-moment at
sound even when listening at low volume levels. the volume is turned down from 64. However, film any user-selected volume setting. The result is bass
Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of reference level is not always used in music or other response, tonal balance and surround impression
deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by non-film content. Audyssey Dynamic EQ Reference that remain constant despite changes in volume.
taking into account human perception and room Level Offset provides three offsets from the film level Dynamic EQ combines information from incoming
acoustics. It does so by selecting the correct reference (5 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB) that can be source levels with actual output sound levels in the
frequency response and surround volume levels selected when the mix level of the content is not room, a prerequisite for delivering a loudness
moment-by-moment so that the content sounds the within the standard. correction solution. Audyssey Dynamic EQ works in
way it was created at any volume level not just at tandem with Audyssey MultEQ to provide well-
Note
reference level. balanced sound for every listener at any volume level.
If Dynamic EQ setting is set to Off, this technology
Reference Level cannot be used. About Audyssey Dynamic Volume
Audyssey Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset Dynamic Volume Audyssey Dynamic Volume solves the problem of
` 0dB: large variations in volume level between television
` Off
This should be selected for movie contents. programs, commercials, and between the soft and
` Light:
loud passages of movies. Dynamic Volume looks at
` 5dB: Activates Light Compression Mode.
the preferred volume setting by the user and then
Select this setting for content that has a very ` Medium: monitors how the volume of program material is being
wide dynamic range, such as classical music. Activates Medium Compression Mode. perceived by listeners in real time to decide whether
` 10dB: ` Heavy: an adjustment is needed. Whenever necessary,
Select this setting for jazz or other music that Activates Heavy Compression Mode. This Dynamic Volume makes the necessary rapid or
has a wider dynamic range. This setting should setting affects volume the most. It quiets the gradual adjustments to maintain the desired playback
also be selected for TV content as that is usually loud parts, such as explosions, and boosts the volume level while optimizing the dynamic range.
mixed at 10 dB below film reference. quiet parts so they can be heard. Audyssey Dynamic EQ is integrated into
` 15dB: Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is
Note
Select this setting for pop/rock music or other adjusted automatically, the perceived bass response,
If you make Dynamic Volume active, Dynamic EQ is set
program material that is mixed at very high tonal balance, surround impression and dialog clarity
to On. The Dynamic Vol indicator will light.
listening levels and has a compressed dynamic remain the same whether watching movies, flipping
When Dynamic EQ is set to Off, Dynamic Volume is
range. between television channels or changing from stereo
automatically switched to Off.
Movies are mixed in rooms calibrated for film to surround sound content.
reference. To achieve the same reference level in a
home theater system each speaker level must be
adjusted so that 30 dBFS band-limited (500 Hz to
2000 Hz) pink noise produces 75 dB sound pressure
level at the listening position. A home theater system
automatically calibrated by Audyssey MultEQ will

Operating
procedure
En-59 ( page 52)
Advanced Operations
IntelliVolume HDMI CEC (RIHD) is set to On ( page 64) and
Name input area
youre listening through your TV speakers.
A/V Sync is disabled when the Pure Audio (European,
IntelliVolume 4 - 4. Name Edit BD/DVD
Australian and Asian models) or Direct listening mode is
` 12dB to 0dB to +12dB in 1 dB steps used with an analog input source.
Name

With IntelliVolume, you can set the input level for This setting cannot be used with the NET, USB and a b c d e f g h i j k l m
n o p q r s t u v w x y z
each input selector individually. This is useful if one of BLUETOOTH input selectors. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ^ \
your source components is louder or quieter than the , . / ; : @ [ ] Space
Shift Back Space OK
others. Name Edit
Use e/r to set the level. +10 Shift CLR All Erase
You can enter a custom name for each individual
If a component is noticeably louder than the others, input selector and radio preset for easy identification.
use e to reduce its input level. If its noticeably When entered, the custom name will appear on the A B C D E F G H I J K L M
quieter, use r to increase its input level. display. N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
! # $ % & ( ) _ = |

Note The custom name is edited using the keyboard < > ? + ` { } Space
Shift Back Space OK
IntelliVolume does not work for Zone 2.
screen.
+10 Shift CLR All Erase
Name
A/V Sync
*1 a b cd *2 e
A/V Sync
1 Use q/w/e/r to select a character, and then
a Toggles between lower and upper case
press ENTER.
` 0msec to 800msec in 10 msec steps characters.*1
Repeat this step to enter up to 10 characters.
When using progressive scanning on your Blu-ray b Moves the cursor left or right in the Name input
Disc/DVD player, you may find that the picture and 2 To store a name when youre done, be sure to
area.
select OK by using q/w/e/r, and then press
sound are out of sync. With this setting, you can c Moves the cursor backward and deletes one
ENTER.
correct this by delaying the audio signals. character.*2
Press ENTER to view the TV picture while setting the d Enters a space character.
delay when the video source is output to HDMI OUT
MAIN. e Confirms your entry.
To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. Tip
To name a radio preset, use TUNER to select AM or FM,
The range of values you can adjust will depend on and then select the preset ( page 38).
whether your TV or display supports HDMI Lip Sync To restore a name to its default, erase all characters with
and if the Lip Sync setting is set to On or not CLR, select OK and then press ENTER.
*1 This can also be performed by using +10 on the remote
( page 66).
controller.
Note *2 Press CLR on the remote controller to delete all the

This setting is not available in either of the following cases: characters you have input.
The Audio TV Out (Main) setting is set to On Note
( page 65) or Audio TV Out (Sub) setting is set to
This setting cannot be used for the NET, USB and
On ( page 65) and youre listening through your TV
BLUETOOTH input selectors.
speakers.

Operating
procedure
En-60 ( page 52)
Advanced Operations
Picture Adjust mode. See Monitor Out for details on the Film Mode*2*4
monitor output setting ( page 53). `Video:
Using Picture Adjust, you can adjust the picture Film Mode detection is not applied and the
quality and reduce any noise appearing on the Picture Mode*1
input signal is handled as a video source.
screen. ` Custom:
`Auto:
Press ENTER to view the TV picture while setting All settings can be performed manually.
Detects whether the input signal is a video or a
when the video source is output to HDMI OUT MAIN. ` Cinema:
movie. If it is a movie, the appropriate
To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. Select when the picture source is a movie or
conversion is applied.
alike.
Wide Mode*1*6 The AV receiver will adjust to the picture source,
` Game:
This setting determines the aspect ratio. automatically converting it to the appropriate
Select when the video source is a game
` 4:3: progressive signal and reproducing the natural quality
console.
of the original picture.
` Standard:
Does not adjust picture quality (changes Edge Enhancement*2*4*5
resolution). `Off
` Bypass: `Low
Does not adjust picture quality (does not change `Mid
` Full: resolution). `High
With Picture Mode, you can change the following With this setting, you can make the picture appear
settings to be suitable for the movie or game screen sharper.
by one operation: Game Mode, Film Mode, Edge
Enhancement, Noise Reduction, Brightness, Noise Reduction*2*4*5
Contrast, Hue, Saturation or Color `Off
` Zoom: Temperature. `Low
`Mid
Game Mode*2*3*4
`High
` Off
With this setting, you can reduce noise appearing on
` On
the screen. Select the desired level.
If video signal delay occurs during playback on a video
component (i.e., game console), select the Brightness*1*2*4
` Wide Zoom: corresponding input source and set the Game Mode `50 to 0 to +50
setting to On. The delay will decrease but in return With this setting, you can adjust the picture
the picture quality will become poor. brightness. 50 is the darkest. +50 is the brightest.
Contrast*1*2*4
`50 to 0 to +50
` Auto: With this setting, you can adjust contrast. 50 is the
According to the input signals and monitor least. +50 is the greatest.
output setting, the AV receiver automatically
selects the 4:3, Full, Zoom or Wide Zoom

Operating
procedure
En-61 ( page 52)
Advanced Operations
Hue*1*2*4 Audio Selector Setting the Incoming Digital Signal (Fixed
` 50 to 0 to +50 Mode)
With this setting, you can adjust the color hue Audio Selector
between 50 and +50. ` ARC: Fixed Mode
Saturation*1*2*4
The audio signal from your TV tuner can be sent `Off:
to HDMI OUT MAIN of the AV receiver.*1 The format is detected automatically. If no digital
` 50 to 0 to +50
With this selection, the TVs audio can be input signal is present, the corresponding analog
With this setting, you can adjust saturation. 50 is automatically selected as a priority among other input is used instead.
the weakest color. +50 is the strongest color. assignments. `PCM:
Color Temperature*2*4 ` HDMI: Only 2-channel PCM format input signals will be
` Warm This can be selected when HDMI IN has been heard. If the input signal is not PCM, the PCM
` Normal assigned as an input source. If both HDMI indicator will flash and noise may also be
` Cool (HDMI IN) and digital audio inputs (COAXIAL IN produced.
or OPTICAL IN) have been assigned, HDMI `DTS:
With this setting, you can adjust the color
input is automatically selected as a priority. Only DTS (but not DTS-HD) format input signals
temperature.
` COAXIAL: will be heard. If the input signal is not DTS, the
Note This can be selected when COAXIAL IN has dts indicator will flash and there will be no
Picture Adjust cannot be used when: been assigned as an input source. If both sound.
The NET, USB or BLUETOOTH input selector is coaxial and HDMI inputs have been assigned, When HDMI, COAXIAL or OPTICAL is selected
selected, or coaxial input is automatically selected as a in the Audio Selector setting, you can then specify
Monitor Out is set to Sub. priority. the signal type in Fixed Mode.
*1 This procedure can also be performed on the remote
` OPTICAL: Normally, the AV receiver detects the signal format
controller by using the Quick Setup ( page 48).
*2 When the Picture Mode setting is set to anything other
This can be selected when OPTICAL IN has automatically. However, if you experience either of
than Custom, this setting cannot be used.
been assigned as an input source. If both optical the following issues when playing PCM or DTS
*3 If the Resolution setting is set to 4K ( page 53), and HDMI inputs have been assigned, optical material, you can manually set the signal format to
this setting is fixed at Off. input is automatically selected as a priority. PCM or DTS.
*4 Press CLR if you want to reset to the default value. ` Analog: If the beginnings of tracks from a PCM source are
*5 If the Game Mode setting is set to On, this setting is The AV receiver always outputs analog signals. cut off, try setting the format to PCM.
fixed at Off. You can set priorities of audio output when there are
*6 When a 3D video source is input, Wide Mode is fixed to
If noise is produced when fast forwarding or
both digital and analog inputs. reversing a DTS CD, try setting the format to DTS.
Full.
Note Note
This setting can be made only for an input source that is The setting will be reset to Off when you change the
assigned to HDMI IN, COAXIAL IN, or OPTICAL IN. setting in Audio Selector.
This setting cannot be used with the NET, USB and
BLUETOOTH input selectors.
*1 You can select ARC if you select the TV/CD input
selector. But you cannot if youve selected Off in the
Audio Return Channel setting ( page 66).

Operating
procedure
En-62 ( page 52)
Advanced Operations

5. Listening Mode Preset For the BLUETOOTH input selector, only Digital 6. Miscellaneous
is available.
You can assign a default listening mode to each input Volume Setup
source that will be selected automatically when you Analog/PCM/Digital
select each input source. For example, you can set With this setting, you can specify the listening mode
Maximum Volume
the default listening mode to be used with Dolby used when an analog (CD, TV, LD, VHS, MD,
turntable, radio, cassette, cable, satellite, etc.) or `Off, 30 to 79
Digital input signals. You can select other listening
PCM digital (CD, DVD, etc.) audio signal is played. With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume.
modes during playback, but the mode specified here
will be resumed once the AV receiver has been set to To disable this setting, select Off.
Mono/Multiplex Source
standby.
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode Power On Volume
used when a mono digital audio signal is played `Last, Min, 1 to 79 or Max
1 Use q/w to select the input source that you
(DVD, etc.). With this preference, you can specify the volume
want to set, and then press ENTER. setting to be used each time the AV receiver is turned
The following menu appears. 2ch Source on.
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode To use the same volume level that was used when
5-1. Listening Mode Preset BD/DVD used when 2-channel (2/0) stereo digital sources, the AV receiver was turned off, select Last.
such as Dolby Digital or DTS, are played.
Analog/PCM
Mono/Multiplex Source
Last Valid e r
Last Valid
The Power On Volume setting cannot be set higher
2ch Source
Dolby D/Dolby D Plus/TrueHD
Last Valid
Last Valid
Dolby D/Dolby D Plus/TrueHD than the Maximum Volume setting.
DTS/DTS-ES/DTS-HD
Other Multich Source
Last Valid
Last Valid
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode Headphone Level
used when Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital Plus
`12dB to 0dB to +12dB
Default listening mode for analog and PCM sources. format digital audio signals are played (DVD, etc.).
With this setting, you can specify the headphone
Specifies the default listening mode for Dolby
volume relative to the main volume. This is useful if
TrueHD sources, such as Blu-ray or HD DVD (input
2 Use q/w to select the signal format that you
via HDMI).
theres a volume difference between your speakers
want to set, and then use e/r to select a and your headphones.
listening mode. DTS/DTS-ES/DTS-HD
Only listening modes that can be used with each With this setting, you can specify the listening mode
input signal format can be selected ( pages 41 used when DTS or DTS-HD High Resolution format
to 45). digital audio signals are played (DVD, LD, CD,
The Last Valid option means that the listening etc.). Specifies the default listening mode for DTS-
mode selected last will be used. HD Master Audio sources, such as Blu-ray or HD
The Straight Decode option means that DVD (input via HDMI).
straight decoding listening mode (Dolby Digital, Other Multich Source
DTS, etc.) is selected. Specifies the default listening mode for
Note multichannel PCM sources from HDMI IN such as
For the TUNER input selector, only Analog will be DVD-Audio, and DSD multichannel sources such
available. as Super Audio CD.
For the NET or USB input selector, Digital and
TrueHD will be available.

Operating
procedure
En-63 ( page 52)
Advanced Operations
OSD Setup 7. Hardware Setup Note
When the setting is set to On and the menu is closed, the
On Screen Display Tuner names of connected p-compatible components and
` On RIHD On are displayed on the AV receiver.
` Off AM/FM Frequency Step (North American and Search (name) RIHD On
This preference determines whether operation details Taiwanese models) When the AV receiver cannot receive the name of the
are displayed on-screen when an AV receiver component, it is displayed as Player* or Recorder*, etc.
` 10kHz/200kHz:
function is adjusted. (* shows up and indicates the number of components,
` 9kHz/50kHz: when two or more are received).
Even when On is selected, operation details may Select the frequency step according to your When an p-compatible component is connected to
not be output if the input source is connected to an area. the AV receiver via an HDMI cable, the name of the
HDMI IN. connected component is displayed on the AV receiver
AM Frequency Step (European, Australian and
Language display. For example, while you are watching TV
Asian models) broadcasting, if you operate a Blu-ray Disc/DVD player
(North American models) ` 10kHz: (being powered on) with the remote control of the AV
` English, Deutsch, Franais, Espaol, Italiano, ` 9kHz: receiver, the name of the Blu-ray Disc/DVD player will be
Nederlands, Svenska Select the frequency step according to your displayed on the AV receiver.
area. Set it to Off when a connected piece of equipment is not
(European, Australian and Asian models)
For AM/FM tuning to work properly, you must specify compatible or it is unclear whether the equipment is
` English, Deutsch, Franais, Espaol, Italiano, compatible or not.
Nederlands, Svenska, , the AM/FM frequency step used in your area.
If operation is not normal when set to On, change the
(Taiwanese models) Note setting to Off.
` English, Deutsch, Franais, Espaol, Italiano, When this setting is changed, all radio presets will be Refer to the connected components instruction manual for
deleted. details.
Nederlands, Svenska, When the HDMI CEC (RIHD) setting is set to On, the
This setting determines the language used for the on- power consumption on standby mode slightly increases.
HDMI
screen menus. (Depending on the TV status, the AV receiver will enter
standby mode as usual.)
Screen Saver HDMI CEC (RIHD)
The p control does not support HDMI OUT SUB.
` 3min, 5min, 10min ` Off Use HDMI OUT MAIN instead.
` Off ` On When the source equipment is connected with the u
With this setting, you can set the time until the screen Turn this setting on to allow p-compatible connection, it may malfunction if HDMI CEC (RIHD) is set
saver activates itself. Once active, the screen saver components connected via HDMI to be controlled by to On.
will go off and the screen will return to its previous the AV receiver ( page 16).
state if the AV receiver is operated in any way.

Operating
procedure
En-64 ( page 52)
Advanced Operations
HDMI Through Audio TV Out (Main) Audio TV Out (Sub)
` Off ` Off `Off
` BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, GAME, PC, AUX, TV/CD, ` On `On
PHONO: This preference determines whether the incoming This preference determines whether the incoming
Selects the input source for which the HDMI audio signal is output from HDMI OUT MAIN. You audio signal is output from HDMI OUT SUB. You may
Through function is enabled. may want to turn this preference on if your TV is want to turn this preference on if your TV is
` Last: connected to HDMI OUT MAIN and you want to listen connected to HDMI OUT SUB and you want to listen
The HDMI Through function is activated on the to the audio from a connected component through to the audio from a connected component through
input source selected at the time of setting the your TVs speakers. Normally, this should be set to your TVs speakers. Normally, this should be set to
AV receiver to standby mode. Off. Off.
When enabling the HDMI Through function, Note Note
regardless of whether the AV receiver is on or in
If On is selected and the audio can be output from the TV, If On is selected and the audio can be output from the TV,
standby, both audio and video streams from an HDMI the AV receiver will output no sound through its speakers. the AV receiver will output no sound through its speakers.
input will be output to the TV or other components via In this case, TV Speaker appears on the AV receivers In this case, TV Speaker appears on the AV receivers
HDMI connection. The HDMI indicator will be dimly-lit display by pressing DISPLAY. display by pressing DISPLAY.
in standby mode. Note that the indicator may not light When HDMI CEC (RIHD) is set to On, this setting is This setting is fixed to Off when Monitor Out is set to
under certain conditions ( page 22). fixed to Auto. Main ( page 53).
This setting is fixed to Auto automatically when the This setting is fixed to Off when Monitor Out is set to When Monitor Out is set to Both ( page 53), and this
above HDMI CEC (RIHD) setting is set to On, Sub ( page 53). setting is enabled, set audio output of source component to
resulting in automatic input source selection. With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be output 2ch PCM.
even when this setting is set to On. With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be output
Note When Audio TV Out (Main) or HDMI CEC (RIHD) is set even when this setting is set to On.
Only an input source assigned to an HDMI IN via to On and youre listening through your TVs speakers, When Audio TV Out (Sub) is set to On and youre
HDMI Input setting is enabled ( page 54). turning up the AV receivers volume control will make the listening through your TVs speakers, turning up the AV
The power consumption in standby mode will increase sound be output from the AV receivers front left and right receivers volume control will make the sound be output
during the HDMI Through function; however in the following speakers. To stop the AV receivers speakers producing from the AV receivers front left and right speakers. To stop
cases, the power consumption can be saved: sound, change the settings, change your TVs settings, or the AV receivers speakers producing sound, change the
The TV is in standby mode. turn down the AV receivers volume. settings, change your TVs settings, or turn down the AV
You are watching a TV program. Listening mode cannot be changed when this setting is set receivers volume.
Refer to the connected components instruction manual for to On and the audio is output from the TV. Listening mode cannot be changed when this setting is set
details. If the audio signal from the player is not supported by the to On and the audio is output from the TV.
Depending on the connected component, the correct input TV, the audio is not output from the TV even if this setting When Monitor Out is set to Both ( page 53) and only
source may not be selected with the setting fixed to Auto. is enabled. When the audio cannot be output from the TV, Audio TV Out (Sub) is set to On, the audio is not output
This setting is set to Off automatically when the HDMI (When Monitor Out is set to Both, the audio cannot be from the TV connected to HDMI OUT SUB except in the
CEC (RIHD) setting is set to Off. output form the TV connected to both HDMI OUT MAIN and case the audio input is via HDMI.
This function is only available for the HDMI OUT MAIN jack. HDMI OUT SUB) the audio is output from the speakers If the audio signal from the player is not supported by the
connected to the AV receiver. TV, the audio is not output from the TV even if this setting
is enabled. When the audio cannot be output from the TV,
(When Monitor Out is set to Both, the audio cannot be
output form the TV connected to both HDMI OUT MAIN and
HDMI OUT SUB) the audio is output from the speakers
connected to the AV receiver.

Operating
procedure
En-65 ( page 52)
Advanced Operations
Audio Return Channel InstaPrevue Default setting: On (European, Australian and
` Off These settings apply to InstaPrevue of the Home Asian models), Off (North American and
` Auto: menu ( page 47) and specify the preview display of Taiwanese models)
The audio signal from your TV tuner can be sent HDMI video streams. Note
to HDMI OUT MAIN of the AV receiver. Sub Window Set to On, the Auto Standby function may activate itself
The audio return channel (ARC) function allows an ` Multi: during playback with some sources.
ARC capable TV to send the audio stream to HDMI Displays preview thumbnails all at once. The Auto Standby function does not work when Zone 2 is
OUT MAIN of the AV receiver. To use this function, ` Single: on.
you must select the TV/CD input selector and your TV Displays preview thumbnails one-by-one.
must be ARC capable. The ARC indicator will light HDMI Through
With this setting, you can set the number of preview
when the audio signal is detected. Default setting: `Off
thumbnails displayed.
- - - - `On
Position This setting enables or disables the Auto Standby
Note (with Sub Window set to Multi) during HDMI Through by detecting the audio/video
This setting is fixed to - - - - when the HDMI CEC (RIHD) ` Top, Bottom, Left, Right input signal.
setting is set to Off.
(with Sub Window set to Single) When this setting is set to On, the AV receiver will
This setting is set to Auto automatically when the HDMI
CEC (RIHD) setting is set to On for the first time. ` Upper Left, Upper Right, Lower Left, Lower automatically enter standby mode if there is no audio
If you set Audio Return Channel to Auto, the Audio Right and no video signal input during HDMI Through for 30
Selector settings of the TV/CD input selector will be With this setting, you can set the position of preview minutes. (The Auto Standby function does not work
automatically switched to ARC ( page 62). thumbnails on the TV screen. when Zone 2 is on.)
Tip Note
When this setting is set to Off, the status of HDMI
After changing the settings of the HDMI CEC (RIHD),
Through is continued regardless of audio/video input
Depending on video signals, the picture may not be
HDMI Through or Audio Return Channel, turn off the signal.
properly rendered on the preview thumbnails of
power on all connected pieces of equipment and then turn InstaPrevue. Tip
them on again. Refer to the users manuals for all
Entering standby mode is possible by setting HDMI CEC
connected pieces of equipment. Auto Standby (RIHD) to On and using CEC-compatible component
Lip Sync regardless of the above-mentioned setting.
` Off Auto Standby See HDMI CEC (RIHD) in 7. Hardware Setup for linked
` Off operation ( page 64).
` On
When the HDMI Through is enabled, the power
This function allows the AV receiver to automatically ` On
consumption slightly increases.
correct any delay between the video and the audio, When Auto Standby is set to On, the ASb
indicator lights and the AV receiver will automatically Note
based on the data from the connected monitor.
enter standby mode if there is no operation for 30 This setting is fixed to Off when Auto Standby is set to
Note Off.
minutes with no audio and no video signal input.
This function works only if your HDMI-compatible TV
Auto Standby will appear on the AV receivers
supports HDMI Lip Sync.
display and OSD 30 seconds before the Auto
Standby comes on.

Operating
procedure
En-66 ( page 52)
Advanced Operations
Network MAC Address Proxy Port
This is the AV receivers MAC (Media Access If youre using a Web proxy, enter a proxy port
This section explains how to configure the AV Control) address. This address cannot be changed. number here.
receivers network settings manually.
After modifying the network settings, you must DHCP Network Standby
confirm the changes by executing Save. ` Enable `On
If your routers DHCP server is enabled, you dont ` Disable `Off
need to change any of these settings, as the AV This setting determines whether or not the AV This setting enables or disables control over the
receiver is set to use DHCP to configure itself receiver uses DHCP to automatically configure its IP network.
automatically by default (i.e., DHCP is set to Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server When enabled, the NET indicator will be dimly-lit
Enable). If, however, your routers DHCP server is settings. while the AV receiver is in standby mode. Note that
disabled (youre for example using static IP), youll the indicator may not light under certain conditions
Note
need to configure these settings yourself, in which ( page 22).
If you select Disable, you must configure the IP
case, a knowledge of Ethernet networking is
Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server Note
essential.
settings yourself. When set to On, the power consumption slightly
Whats DHCP?
IP Address increases in standby mode.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is used
by routers, computers, the AV receiver, and other ` Class A: Update Notice
devices to automatically configure themselves on a 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255 `Enable
network. ` Class B: `Disable
Whats DNS? 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255 When this setting is enabled, you will be notified if a
The DNS (Domain Name System) translates domain ` Class C: firmware update via network of high importance is
names into IP addresses. For example, when you 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255 available.
enter a domain name such as www.onkyousa.com in Enter a static IP address provided by your Internet
Note
your Web browser, before accessing the site, your Service Provider (ISP).
browser uses DNS to translate this into an IP Selecting Never Remind me on the notification window
Most routers use Class C IP addresses.
will switch this setting to Disable ( page 22).
address, in this case 63.148.251.142.
Subnet Mask For details on the update notification, see Firmware
Network Connection Enter the subnet mask address provided by your ISP Update Notification ( page 22).
` Wired (typically 255.255.255.0).
` Wireless
Gateway
This setting determines whether you connect the AV
Enter the gateway address provided by your ISP.
receiver to network by wired LAN or wireless LAN. If
you connect by wireless LAN, select Wireless. See DNS Server
Performing Wireless LAN Setup for setting Enter the DNS server address provided by your ISP.
( page 27).
Proxy URL
Tip To use a Web proxy, enter its URL here.
The same setting is available even if Wireless is selected
in Network Connection in initial setup ( page 23).

Operating
procedure
En-67 ( page 52)
Advanced Operations
Bluetooth
8. Remote Controller Setup 9. Lock Setup
This setting enables the AV receiver to pair with
Bluetooth-enabled device. Remote ID With this preference, you can protect your settings by
Status locking the setup menus.
Press ENTER button to display Now Pairing and Remote ID Setup
start pairing. ` 1, 2, or 3 `Locked
Tip When several Onkyo components are used in the `Unlocked
If pairing setting is not set, Ready appears on-screen same room, their remote ID codes may overlap. To When Locked is selected, the setup menus will be
display. The name of the device paired with the AV receiver differentiate the AV receiver from other components, locked and you cannot change any setting.
is displayed if pairing setting is set. you can change its remote ID from 1, to 2 or 3.
For details on the Bluetooth connection, refer to the
Note
instruction manual of the Bluetooth-enabled device.
If you do change the AV receivers remote ID, be sure to
The pairing can be done by holding down BLUETOOTH
change the remote controller to the same ID (see below),
button on the AV receiver until BLUETOOTH indicator
otherwise, you wont be able to control it with the remote
flashes.
controller.
Note
Changing the remote controllers ID
This setting cannot be selected if youve selected NET or
USB as input selector in Zone 2.
1 While holding down RECEIVER, press and
hold down Q SETUP until the remote indicator
Initial Setup
lights (about 3 seconds).
If you skipped the initial setup wizard, for example on
first-time use, you can reaccess it from here. 2 Use the number buttons to enter ID 1, 2, or 3.
The remote indicator flashes twice.
See Initial Setup ( page 22).
Note Remote Mode Setup
This setting cannot be selected if the Monitor Out setting
See Looking up for Remote Control Codes
is set to Sub.
( page 71).

Operating
procedure
En-68 ( page 52)
Advanced Operations

Zone 2
In addition to the main listening room, you can also enjoy playback in another room, or as we call Zone 2. And, you can select a different source for each room.

Making Zone 2 Connections

Connecting Your Zone 2 Speakers Directly to the AV receiver Connecting the Zone Speakers to an Additional Amplifier
This setup allows you to select different sources for Main room and Zone 2. This is This setup allows 7.1-channel playback in your main listening room and 2-channel
called Powered Zone, as the Zone 2 speakers are powered by the AV receiver. stereo playback in Zone 2.

To use this setup, you must activate the Powered Zone 2 setting ( page 55).

Main room Main room

TV TV

AV receiver AV receiver

Zone 2
Zone 2 IN

R L

R L
Receiver/
integrated amp

Note Note
With this setup, the volume of Zone 2 is controlled by the AV receiver. The volume of Zone 2 must be set on the Zone 2 amplifier.
When Powered Zone 2 is used, playback in the main room is reduced to 5.1 channels.

En-69
Advanced Operations

Controlling Zone 2 Components Tip


1 Press ZONE2, then point the remote controller
To unmute, press ZONE2 followed by MUTING again.
Operating on the AV receiver at the AV receiver and press 8RECEIVER. Zone can also be unmuted by adjusting the volume.
Zone 2 turns on, the Z2 indicator lights on the AV
Input selector buttons Note
receivers display.
ZONE 2 OFF MASTER VOLUME Only analog, NET or USB input source is output from the
2 To select an input source for Zone 2, press
ZONE2, followed by an INPUT SELECTOR
ZONE 2 LINE OUT jacks and ZONE 2 L/R terminals.
You cannot select different AM or FM radio stations for your
button. main room and Zone 2. The same AM/FM radio station will
be heard in each room. Namely, if you have selected an FM
3 To turn off Zone 2, press ZONE2, followed by
station for the main room, that station will also be output in
8RECEIVER. Zone 2.
The zone is turned off. You cannot select different input selector NET or USB for
your main room and Zone 2. Namely, if you have selected
Adjusting the Volume for Zone 2 USB input selector for Zone 2, USB input selector will be
1 To turn on Zone 2 and select an input source,
press ZONE 2 followed by an input selector
selected in main room even if NET has been selected for
Operating on the remote controller main room.
button within 8 seconds. BLUETOOTH cannot be selected as input selector in
Zone 2 turns on, the Z2 indicator lights on the AV Zone 2. If you play audio from Bluetooth-enabled device in
receivers display. 1 Press ZONE2.
Zone 2, select Z2 Sel: Source, and BLUETOOTH as
input selector in Main room.
To select the same source as the main rooms, 2 Use VOL q/w. When Zone 2 is activated and its input selector is selected,
press ZONE 2 twice. Z2 Sel: Source appears the power consumption of standby mode slightly increases.
on the AV receivers display. Operating on the AV receiver While Zone 2 is on, u functions will not work.
When setting the AV receiver to standby mode while
2 To turn off Zone 2, press OFF.
Zone 2 is active, the Z2 indicator is dimly lit.
The zone is turned off. 1 Press ZONE 2 (the Z2 indicator on the AV
receivers display flashes). Activating Zones in the main room when the listening mode
is set to Pure Audio (European, Australian and Asian
Operating on the remote controller
To control Zone 2, you must press ZONE2 on the
2 Use MASTER VOLUME control within 8
seconds.
models) will automatically switch it to Direct.

remote controller first.


If your Zone 2 speakers are connected to a receiver
or integrated amplifier in Zone 2, use its volume
control to adjust the volume.
8RECEIVER ZONE2
INPUT Muting Zone 2
SELECTOR

MUTING Operating on the remote controller


VOLq/w
1 Press ZONE2 followed by MUTING.

En-70
Controlling Other Components

Controlling Other 3 Use q/w to select Remote Controller Setup, Entering Remote Control Codes
and then press ENTER.
Components Youll need to enter a code for each component that
4 Use q/w to select Remote Mode Setup, and you want to control.
You can use the AV receivers remote controller to then press ENTER.
control your other AV components, including those
made by other manufacturers. This section explains 5 Use q/w to select a remote mode, and then 1 Look up the appropriate remote control code
in the separate Remote Control Codes list.
press ENTER.
how to enter the remote control code for a component The codes are organized by category (e.g., DVD
that you want to control: DVD, TV, CD, etc. The menu of category selection appears.
player, TV, etc.).
6 Use q/w to select a category, and then press
Preprogrammed Remote Control ENTER. 2 While holding down the REMOTE MODE
button to which you want to assign a code,
The keyboard screen for brand name input
Codes press and hold down DISPLAY (about 3
appears.
seconds).
The following REMOTE MODE buttons are
preprogrammed with remote control codes for 7 Use q/w/e/r to select a character, and then The remote indicator lights.
press ENTER.
controlling the components listed. You do not need to Note
Repeat this step for the first three characters of
enter a remote control code to control these Remote control codes cannot be entered for
the brand name.
components. RECEIVER and the multi zone button.
When you have entered the 3rd character, select
For details on controlling these components, see the Only TV remote control codes can be entered for TV.
Search and press ENTER. Except for RECEIVER, TV, and the multi zone button,
indicated pages.
A list of brand names is retrieved. remote control codes from any category can be
BD/DVD Onkyo Blu-ray Disc player ( page 73) If the desired brand name is not found: assigned for the REMOTE MODE buttons. However,
Use r to select Not Listed, and then press these buttons also work as input selector buttons, so
TV/CD Onkyo CD player ( page 72) choose a REMOTE MODE button that corresponds
PC Apple TV ENTER.
with the input to which you connect your component.
The keyboard screen for brand name input For example, if you connect your CD player to the CD
appears. input, choose TV/CD when entering its remote control
code.
Looking up for Remote Control Codes 8 Use q/w to select a brand, and then press

You can look up for an appropriate remote control


ENTER. 3 Within 30 seconds, use the number buttons to
enter the 5-digit remote control code.
A remote control code with its instructions are
code from the on-screen menu. displayed. Follow the procedure. The remote indicator flashes twice.
Note If the remote control code is not entered
You need to connect your TV to the HDMI output (HDMI
9 If you can control the component, use q/w to
successfully, the remote indicator will flash once
select OK, and then press ENTER.
OUT MAIN) to make the following on-screen setting. slowly.
The on-screen menu returns to the Remote
Mode Setup front screen.
1 Press RECEIVER followed by HOME. Note
If you cannot control the component, use q/w Though the provided remote control codes are correct at
2 Use e/r or q/w to select Setup, and then to select Try Next Code and press ENTER. the time of release, they are subject to change.
press ENTER.
The next code is displayed.

Operating
procedure
En-71 ( page 52)
Controlling Other Components
`32901/33104/33504:
Remapping Colored Buttons Remote Control Codes for Onkyo
Onkyo HD DVD player
Components Connected via RI `70868:
You can change the configuration of colored buttons,
with which REMOTE MODE buttons are preset. Onkyo components that are connected via u are Onkyo MD recorder without u
controlled by pointing the remote controller at the AV `71323:
1 While holding down the REMOTE MODE
button that you want to program, press and
receiver, not the component. This allows you to Onkyo CD recorder without u
control components that are out of view, in a rack, for `82990:
hold down A (Red) until the remote indicator example. Onkyo Dock without u
lights (about 3 seconds).
You can only change colored buttons for
components whose codes belong to categories 1 Make sure the Onkyo component is connected
Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons
with an u cable and an analog audio cable
of the Remote Control Codes list (BD/DVD (RCA). You can reset a REMOTE MODE button to its default
player, TV, cable set-top box, etc).
See Connecting Onkyo RI Components for remote control code.
2 Within 30 seconds, press the colored buttons
in the order that you want to reassign them.
details ( page 20).

The button presses are assigned to each button 2 Enter the appropriate remote control code for 1 While holding down the REMOTE MODE
button that you want to reset, press and hold
a REMOTE MODE button, by referring to the
from left to right. The remote indicator flashes down HOME until the remote indicator lights
previous section.
twice, indicating that the sequence has been (about 3 seconds).
` 42157:
successfully assigned. If the sequence is not
successfully assigned, the remote indicator will Onkyo cassette tape deck with u 2 Within 30 seconds, press the REMOTE MODE
button again.
flash once slowly. ` 81993:
Onkyo Dock with u The remote indicator flashes twice, indicating that
the button has been reset.
Tip 3 Press the REMOTE MODE button, point the
remote controller at the AV receiver, and
Each REMOTE MODE button is preprogrammed
To reset the REMOTE MODE buttons to their default with a remote control code. When a button is
settings, see Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons. operate the component. reset, its preprogrammed code is restored.
Note
Controlling Onkyo components without u
If any other button than the colored buttons is pressed, the
If you want to control an Onkyo component by Resetting the Remote Controller
operation will be cancelled.
This operation cannot be done while the AV receiver is in pointing the remote controller directly at it, or you You can reset the remote controller to its default
Receiver mode or when Zone 2 is active. want to control an Onkyo component thats not settings.
connected via u, use the following remote control
codes:
` 30627:
1 While holding down RECEIVER, press and
hold down HOME until the remote indicator
Onkyo DVD player without u lights (about 3 seconds).
` 71817:
Onkyo CD player without u
2 Within 30 seconds, press RECEIVER again.
The remote indicator flashes twice, indicating that
` 32900/33100/33500: the remote controller has been reset.
Onkyo Blu-ray Disc player

En-72
Controlling Other Components

Controlling Other Components Controlling MHL-Enabled Mobile Device


Press the appropriate REMOTE
By programming the supplied remote controller with MODE button first.
By pressing the REMOTE MODE button thats been
the appropriate remote control code, you can use it to
programmed with the remote control code for your
operate your MHL-enabled mobile device.
component, you can control your component as
described below. Connect your MHL-enabled mobile device to the
HDMI IN 1 jack. We advise you to program the h
For details on entering a remote control code for other
remote control code on the AUX button.
components, see Entering Remote Control Codes
( page 71). Use the following remote control codes:
(North American and Taiwanese models)
Controlling a TV ` 33101:
MHL-enabled mobile device i
TV is preprogrammed with the remote control code (European, Australian, and Asian models) j
for controlling a TV that supports the p*1 ` 32910:
(limited to some models). The TV must be able to a
MHL-enabled mobile device
receive remote control commands via p and
Note k
be connected to the AV receiver via HDMI. If l
With some mobile devices, reliable operation cannot be b
controlling your TV via p doesnt work very
guaranteed.
well, program your TVs remote control code into TV c
and use the TV remote mode to control your TV. Controlling a Blu-ray Disc/DVD Player, HD d m
Use the following remote control codes: DVD Player or DVD Recorder
` 11807/13100/13500: n
TV with p BD/DVD is preprogrammed with the remote control
code for controlling a component that supports the e
Controlling Apple TV p*1 (limited to some models). The component
must be able to receive remote control commands via f
By programming the supplied remote controller with
p and be connected to the AV receiver via
the appropriate remote control code, you can use it to
HDMI.
operate your Apple TV.
Use the following remote control codes:
Use the following remote control codes: g
` 32910/33101/33501/31612:
` 02615:
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player with p o
Apple TV

*1 The p supported by the AV receiver is the CEC


system control function of the HDMI standard.

En-73
Controlling Other Components
TV operation DVD player/DVD recorder operation Satellite receiver/Cable receiver operation
Available buttons Available buttons Available buttons
a 8, INPUT, TV VOL q/w, g Number: 1 to 9, 0 b TOP MENU h 8SOURCE b GUIDE h 8SOURCE
MUTING Number: +10*1 c q/w/e/r, ENTER i DISPLAY c q/w/e/r, ENTER i DISPLAY
b GUIDE i DISPLAY d SETUP j MUTING d SETUP j MUTING
c q/w/e/r, ENTER k CH +/ e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, k CH +/ e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, k CH +/
d SETUP l PREV CH 7, 6 DISC +/ 7, 6 l PREV CH
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, m RETURN f A (Red)*1 l MENU f A (Red) m RETURN
7, 6*1 n AUDIO*1 B (Green) m RETURN B (Green) n AUDIO
f A (Red)*1 o CLR C (Yellow)*1 n AUDIO*1 C (Yellow) o CLR
B (Green)*1 D (Blue)*1 o CLR D (Blue)
C (Yellow)*1 g Number: 1 to 9, 0 g Number: 1 to 9, 0
D (Blue)*1 Number: +10*1 Number: +10

Blu-ray Disc player/HD DVD player operation VCR/PVR operation CD player/CD recorder/MD recorder operation
Available buttons Available buttons Available buttons
b TOP MENU h 8SOURCE b GUIDE h 8SOURCE c q/w/e/r, ENTER g Number: 1 to 9, 0
c q/w/e/r, ENTER i DISPLAY c q/w/e/r, ENTER i DISPLAY d SETUP Number: +10
d SETUP j MUTING d SETUP j MUTING e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, h 8SOURCE
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, k CH +/ e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, k CH +/ 7, 6 i DISPLAY
7, 6 DISC +/ 7, 6 l PREV CH f SEARCH j MUTING
f A (Red) l MENU g Number: 1 to 9, 0 m RETURN REPEAT k DISC +/
B (Green) m RETURN Number: +10 o CLR RANDOM o CLR
C (Yellow) n AUDIO*1 MODE
Cassette tape deck operation
D (Blue) o CLR
g Number: 1 to 9, 0 Available buttons Note
Number: +10*1 e 1, t (Reverse h 8SOURCE With some components, certain buttons may not work as
Playback), 2, 5, 4, j MUTING expected, and some may not work at all.
7, 6 See Controlling Your iPod/iPhone about the operation of
iPod/iPhone ( page 76).
*1 The p function is not supported. The p
supported by the AV receiver is the CEC system control
function of the HDMI standard.

En-74
Controlling Other Components
Direct Change
Using the Onkyo Dock The Dock is sold separately. Models sold are
If you start iPod/iPhone playback while listening to different depending on the region.
RI Dock another input source, the AV receiver will
For the latest information on the Onkyo Dock
automatically switch to the input to which the RI Dock
components, see the Onkyo web site at:
With the RI Dock, you can easily play the music of is connected.
http://www.onkyo.com
your iPod/iPhone, or watch the slideshows and Other Remote Operations
videos of your iPod/iPhone on a TV. In addition, the Before using the Onkyo Dock components, update
You can use the remote controller that came with the your iPod/iPhone with the latest software, available
on-screen display (OSD) allows you to view, AV receiver to control other iPod/iPhone functions.
navigate, and select your iPod/iPhone models from the Apple web site.
The available functionality depends on the AV For supported iPod/iPhone models, see the
contents on your TV, and with the supplied remote receiver.
controller, you can control your iPod/iPhone from the instruction manual of the Onkyo Dock.
comfort of your sofa. You can even use the AV Note
receivers remote controller to operate your If you use your iPod/iPhone with any other accessories,
iPod/iPhone. iPod/iPhone playback detection may not work.
The System On function may not work depending on the RI
Note Dock.
Enter the appropriate remote control code before using the iPod Alarm
AV receivers remote controller for the first time
( page 72).
If you use the Alarm function on your iPod to start
Connect the RI Dock to the AV receiver with an u cable
playback, the AV receiver will turn on at the specified
( page 20). time and select your iPod as the input source
Set the RI Docks RI MODE switch to HDD or automatically.
HDD/DOCK. Note
Set the AV receivers Input Display to DOCK
( page 46). Depending on your iPod/iPhone model and generation,
some of the linked operations may not be available.
System Function This linked operation wont work while a video is being
played or when the sound set for the alarm is a built-in
System On
sound (Beep).
When you turn on the AV receiver, the RI Dock and This linked operation wont work with models on which
iPod/iPhone turn on automatically. In addition, when music files cannot be used to set the alarm sound.
RI Dock and iPod/iPhone are on, the AV receiver can
be turned on by pressing 8SOURCE. Operating Notes
Use the AV receivers volume control to adjust the playback
Auto Power On volume.
If you press the remote controllers 1 (Playback) While your iPod/iPhone is inserted in the RI Dock, its
while the AV receiver is on standby, the AV receiver volume control has no effect.
will automatically turn on, select your iPod/iPhone as If you do adjust the volume control on your iPod/iPhone
the input source, and your iPod/iPhone will start while its inserted in the RI Dock, be careful that its not set
playback. too loud before you reconnect your headphones.

En-75
Controlling Other Components

Controlling Your iPod/iPhone u Dock operation


Press the appropriate REMOTE
Available buttons
By pressing the REMOTE MODE button thats been MODE button first.
a TOP MENU*1 e 8SOURCE*2
programmed with the remote control code for your
Dock, you can control your iPod/iPhone in the Dock b q/w/e/r, ENTER f DISPLAY*3
with the buttons described further in this section. PLAYLIST e/r g MUTING
e h ALBUM +/
See Entering Remote Control Codes for details on c 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,
entering a remote control code ( page 71). 7, 6 i VOL q/w
See the Docks instruction manual for more d REPEAT j MENU
information. f RANDOM k MODE*4
g
RI Dock With some iPod/iPhone models, generations and RI Docks,
h certain buttons may not work as expected.
Set the RI Docks RI MODE switch to HDD or For detailed operation of iPod/iPhone, please refer to the
HDD/DOCK. i instruction manual of the RI Dock.
*1 TOP MENU works as the mode button when used with
8SOURCE may not work with a remote control
the DS-A2 RI Dock.
code (without u). In this case, make an u a j *2 This button does not turn the Onkyo DS-A2 or DS-A2X
connection and enter the remote control code 81993 RI Dock on or off. Also, your iPod/iPhone may not
(with u). b respond the first time you press this button, in which case
you should press it again. This is because the remote
With the RI Control
controller transmits the On and Standby commands
Make an u connection and enter the remote control alternately, so if your iPod/iPhone is already on, it will
code 81993 (with u). c remain on when the remote controller transmits the On
Set the AV receivers Input Display to DOCK command. Similarly, if your iPod/iPhone is already off, it
( page 46). will remain off when the remote controller transmits the
k Off command.
d
Without the RI Control *3 DISPLAY turns on the backlight for a few seconds.
*4 Resume mode
You must enter the remote control code 82990 first
( page 72). With the Resume function, you can resume playback of
the song that was playing when you removed your
iPod/iPhone from the Onkyo DS-A2 RI Dock.

En-76
Appendix

Troubleshooting seconds). Within 30 seconds, press RECEIVER


again.
Audio
If you have any trouble using the AV receiver, look for The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is Theres no sound, or its very quiet
a solution in this section. If you cant resolve the issue connected to HDMI OUT MAIN. Make sure that the digital input source is selected properly.
yourself, contact your Onkyo dealer. ( page 55)
Power Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed in all
the way ( page 15).
Resetting the AV receiver
Cant turn on the AV receiver Make sure that the inputs and outputs of all components
If you cant resolve the issue yourself, try resetting the Make sure that the power cord is properly plugged into the are connected properly. ( pages 15 to 20)
AV receiver before contacting your Onkyo dealer. wall outlet. Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables is correct,
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait five and that the bare wires are in contact with the metal part of
To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults, turn it
seconds or more, then plug it in again. each speaker terminal. ( page 13)
on and, while holding down CBL/SAT, press
Make sure that the input source is properly selected.
8ON/STANDBY. Clear will appear on the AV The AV receiver turns off unexpectedly ( page 29)
receivers display and the AV receiver will enter The AV receiver will automatically enter standby mode Make sure that the speaker cables are not shorting.
standby mode. when Auto Standby has been set and launches.
( page 14)
( page 66)
Check the volume. The AV receiver is designed for home
The AV receiver turns off and after restoring the theater enjoyment. It has a wide volume range, allowing
power, it turns off again precise adjustment.
The protection circuit has been activated. Remove the If the MUTING indicator is flashing on the AV receivers
power cord from the wall outlet immediately. Make sure display, press the remote controllers MUTING button to
Note that resetting the AV receiver will delete your that all speaker cables and input sources are properly unmute the AV receiver. ( page 46)
radio presets and custom settings. connected, and leave the AV receiver with its power cord While a pair of headphones is connected to the PHONES
disconnected for 1 hour. After that, reconnect the power jack, no sound is output from the speakers. ( page 20)
cord and turn the power on. If the AV receiver turns off
If theres no sound from a DVD player connected to an
again, avoid resetting it and unplug the power cord. Then
Remote indicator HDMI IN, check the DVD players output settings, and be
contact your Onkyo dealer. ( page 14)
sure to select a supported audio format.
Check the digital audio output setting on the connected
Caution: device. On some game consoles, such as those that
If CHECK SP WIRE appears on the AV receivers support DVD, the default setting is off.
RECEIVER display, the speaker cables may be shorting. With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an audio
output format from a menu.
WARNING: If your turntable uses an MC cartridge, you must connect
If smoke, smell or abnormal noise is produced by the AV an MC head amp, or an MC transformer.
receiver, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Make sure that none of the connecting cables are bent,
HOME immediately and contact your Onkyo dealer. twisted, or damaged.
Not all listening modes use all speakers. ( page 41)
To reset the remote controller to its factory defaults, Specify the speaker distances and adjust the individual
while holding down RECEIVER, press and hold down speaker levels. ( page 56, 57)
HOME until the remote indicator lights (about 3 Make sure that the speaker setup microphone is not still
connected.

En-77
Appendix

If the input signal format is set to PCM or DTS. Set it to When Powered Zone 2 is used, playback in the main room Noise can be heard
Off. ( page 62) is reduced to 5.1channels and the front high and surround Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power cords,
back speakers produce no sound. speaker cables, and the like may degrade the audio
Only the front speakers produce sound performance, so refrain from doing it.
When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected, only The subwoofer produces no sound
An audio cable may be picking up interference. Try
the front speakers and subwoofer produce sound. When you play source material that contains no information repositioning your cables.
( page 43) in the LFE channel, the subwoofer produces no sound.
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly. Make sure the speakers are configured correctly. The Late Night function doesnt work
( page 55) ( page 55) Make sure the source material is Dolby Digital, Dolby
Digital Plus, and Dolby TrueHD. ( page 50)
Only the center speaker produces sound Theres no sound with a certain signal format
Make sure that the TrueHD Loudness Management
If you use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro Logic Check the digital audio output setting on the connected setting is not set to Off. The Late Night function doesnt
IIx Music, or Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game listening mode with device. On some game consoles, such as those that work when this setting is disabled. ( page 58)
a mono source, such as an AM radio station or mono TV support DVD, the default setting is off.
program, the sound is concentrated in the center speaker. With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an audio About DTS signals
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly. output format from a menu. When DTS program material ends and the DTS bitstream
( page 55) Depending on the input signal, some listening modes stops, the AV receiver remains in DTS listening mode and
cannot be selected. ( pages 41 to 45) the dts indicator remains on. This is to prevent noise when
The surround speakers produce no sound you use the pause, fast forward, or fast reverse function on
When the T-D (Theater-Dimensional), Stereo or Mono Cant select the Pure Audio listening mode your player. If you switch your player from DTS to PCM,
listening mode is selected, the surround speakers produce (European, Australian and Asian models) The Pure you may not hear any sound because the AV receiver does
no sound. Audio listening mode cannot be selected while Zone 2 is not switch formats immediately. In such case, you should
Depending on the source and current listening mode, not on. stop your player for about three seconds and then resume
much sound may be produced by the surround speakers. playback.
Try selecting another listening mode. ( page 41) Cant get 6.1/7.1 playback With some CD and LD players, you wont be able to
If no surround back speakers and front high speakers are playback DTS material properly even though your player is
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.
( page 55) connected, or the Zone 2 speakers are being used, 6.1/7.1 connected to a digital input on the AV receiver. This is
playback is not possible. usually because the DTS bitstream has been processed
The center speaker produces no sound Depending on the number of connected speakers, it is not (e.g., output level, sampling rate, or frequency response
When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected, the always possible to select all of the listening modes. changed) and the AV receiver doesnt recognize it as a
center speaker produces no sound. ( pages 41 to 45) genuine DTS signal. In such cases, you may hear noise.
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly. The speaker volume cannot be set as required Playing DTS program material, using the pause, fast
( page 55) forward, or fast reverse function on your player may
Check to see if a maximum volume has been set.
produce a short audible noise. This is not a malfunction.
The front high and surround back speakers ( page 63)
produce no sound If the volume level of each individual speaker has been The beginning of audio received by an HDMI IN
Depending on the current listening mode, no sound may be adjusted to high positive values, then the maximum master cant be heard
produced by the front high and surround back speakers. volume possible may be reduced. Note that the individual Since it takes longer to identify the format of an HDMI
Select another listening mode. ( page 41) speaker volume levels are set automatically after the signal than it does for other digital audio signals, audio
Depending on the sources, the sound produced by the Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup output may not start immediately.
front high and surround back speakers may be weak. has been performed. ( pages 24, 57)
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.
( page 55)

En-78
Appendix
The on-screen menus dont appear If the AV receiver is installed in a rack or cabinet with
Video
On your TV, make sure that the video input to which the AV colored-glass doors, the remote controller may not work
Theres no picture receiver is connected is selected. reliably when the doors are closed.
Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed in all When the AV receiver is not connected to a TV via HDMI Make sure youve selected the correct remote controller
the way. ( page 18) OUT MAIN, on-screen menus are not displayed. mode. ( pages 11, 73)
Make sure that each video component is properly The on-screen display does not appear When using the remote controller to control other
connected. ( page 15) manufacturers AV components, some buttons may not
Depending on the input signal, the on-screen display may
If your TV is connected to the HDMI output(s), select work as expected.
not appear when the input signal from HDMI IN is output to
- - - - - in the HDMI Input setting to watch composite a device connected to HDMI OUT MAIN. Make sure youve entered the correct remote control code.
video, and component video sources. ( page 54) ( page 71)
If the video source is connected to a component video Make sure to set the same ID on both the AV receiver and
Tuner remote controller. ( page 68)
input, you must assign that input to an input selector, and
your TV must be connected to either the HDMI output(s) or Reception is noisy, FM stereo reception is noisy,
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT. ( pages 15, 54)
Cant control other components
or the FM STEREO indicator doesnt light If its an Onkyo component, make sure that the u cable
If the video source is connected to a composite video input,
Relocate your antenna. and analog audio cable are connected properly.
your TV must be connected to the HDMI output(s) or the
corresponding composite video output. ( page 15) Move the AV receiver away from your TV or computer. Connecting only an u cable wont be enough.
Listen to the station in mono. ( page 38) ( page 20)
If the video source is connected to an HDMI input, you
must assign that input to an input selector, and your TV When listening to an AM station, operating the remote Make sure youve selected the correct remote controller
must be connected to the HDMI output(s). ( pages 15, controller may cause noise. mode. ( pages 11, 73)
54) Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference. If youve connected an cassette tape deck to the TV/CD IN
(European, Australian and Asian models) While the jack, or an RI Dock to the TV/CD IN or GAME IN jacks, for
Concrete walls weaken radio signals.
Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the analog video the remote controller to work properly, you must set the
If nothing improves the reception, install an outdoor input display appropriately. ( page 46)
circuitry is turned off and only video signals input through
antenna.
HDMI IN can be output. ( page 41) If you cannot operate it, you will need to enter the
On your TV, make sure that the video input to which the AV appropriate remote control code. ( page 71)
receiver is connected is selected. Remote Controller To control another manufacturers component, point the
When the Monitor Out setting is set to Both, the HDMI remote controller at that component. ( page 71)
The remote controller doesnt work
Through setting is only available for the HDMI OUT MAIN To control an Onkyo component thats connected via u,
jack. ( pages 53, 65) Before operating this unit, be sure to press RECEIVER. point the remote controller at the AV receiver. Be sure to
Make sure that the batteries are installed with the correct enter the appropriate remote control code first.
Theres no picture from a source connected to polarity. ( page 11) ( page 72)
an HDMI IN Install new batteries. Dont mix different types of batteries, To control an Onkyo component thats not connected via
Reliable operation with an HDMI-to-DVI adapter is not or old and new batteries. ( page 11) u, point the remote controller at the component. Be sure
guaranteed. In addition, video signals from a PC are not
Make sure that the remote controller is not too far away to enter the appropriate remote control code first.
guaranteed. ( page 88)
from the AV receiver, and that theres no obstruction ( page 72)
When the resolution is set to any resolution not supported between the remote controller and the AV receivers The entered remote control code may not be correct. If
by the TV, no video is output from the HDMI outputs. remote control sensor. ( page 11) more than one code is listed, try each one.
( page 53)
Make sure that the AV receiver is not subjected to direct
If the message Resolution Error appears on the AV sunshine or inverter-type fluorescent lights. Relocate if
receivers display, this indicates that your TV does not necessary.
support the current video resolution and you need to select
another resolution on your DVD player.

En-79
Appendix
iPod/iPhone doesnt work properly If there is more than one access point in the network,
RI Dock for iPod/iPhone
Try reconnecting your iPod/iPhone. separate each access point.
Theres no sound It is recommended to place the Wi-Fi router (access point)
Make sure your iPod/iPhone is actually playing. Zone 2 and the AV receiver in the same room.
Make sure your iPod/iPhone is properly inserted in the
Dock. Theres no sound Bluetooth
Make sure the AV receiver is turned on, the correct input Audio can be output only when analog, NET or USB input
source is selected, and the volume is turned up. source is selected in Zone 2. Music playback is unavailable on the AV
Make sure the plugs are pushed in all the way. The Zone 2 speakers produce no sound receiver even after successful Bluetooth
Try resetting your iPod/iPhone. Powered Zone 2 cannot be used if Speakers Type connection.
(Front) is set to Bi-Amp. ( page 55) Depending on the characteristics or specifications of your
Theres no video Bluetooth-enabled device, playback on the AV receiver is
Make sure that your iPod/iPhone models TV OUT setting not guaranteed.
is set to On. Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Network
The audio quality is poor after connection with a
Make sure the correct input is selected on your TV or the
Cannot access to Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) network Bluetooth-enabled device.
AV receiver.
or Sound playback is interrupted and The Bluetooth reception is poor. Move the Bluetooth-
Some versions of the iPod/iPhone do not output video.
communication doesnt work enabled device closer to the AV receiver or remove any
The AV receivers remote controller doesnt The setting of SSID and encryption (WEP, etc.) is not obstacle between the Bluetooth-enabled device and the AV
control my iPod/iPhone correct. Make the same settings for network and the AV receiver.
receiver.
Make sure your iPod/iPhone is properly inserted in the Cannot connect with the AV receiver.
Dock. If your iPod/iPhone is in a case, it may not connect Cannot receive radio wave due to a bad connection. The Bluetooth-enabled device does not support the profiles
properly to the Dock. Always remove your iPod/iPhone Shorten the distance from wireless LAN access point or required for the AV receiver.
from the case before inserting it into the Dock. remove obstacles for a good visibility, and try again. Place
the AV receiver away from microwave ovens or other The Bluetooth function of the Bluetooth-enabled device is
The iPod/iPhone cannot be operated while its displaying not enabled. Refer to the user manual of the Bluetooth-
the Apple logo. access points.
enabled device for how to enable the function.
Make sure youve selected the right remote mode. 2.4 GHz band for wireless LAN may not be enough.
( page 76) Connect the ETHERNET port and router with the Ethernet Bluetooth connection cannot be built
cable after selecting Wired in Network Connection When building a Bluetooth connection between the AV
When you use the AV receivers remote controller, point it setting in Network. ( pages 16, 67)
toward your AV receiver. receiver and your Bluetooth-enabled device for the first
Place the AV receiver away from the devices emitting time, if the connection is fail, you need to power off your
If you still cant control your iPod/iPhone, start playback by Bluetooth-enabled device and power on again to clear the
electromagnetic waves on the 2.4 GHz band (microwave
pressing your iPod/iPhone models Play button. Remote ovens, game consoles, etc.). If this does not solve the device name, and build the connection again.
operation should then be possible.
problem, stop using other devices which emit If there is metallic object near the AV receiver, Bluetooth
Try resetting your iPod/iPhone. electromagnetic waves. connection may not be possible as the metal can effect on
Depending on your iPod/iPhone, some buttons may not When other wireless LAN devices are used near the AV the radio wave.
work as expected. receiver, several issues such as interrupted playback and If the wireless LAN and Bluetooth connections are used at
communication may occur. You can avoid these issues by
The AV receiver unexpectedly selects my the same time, try to connect the ETHERNET port and
changing the channel of your Wi-Fi router. For instructions router with the Ethernet cable after selecting Wired in
iPod/iPhone as the input source on changing channels, see the instruction manual provided Network Connection setting in Network for a better
Always pause iPod/iPhone playback before selecting a with your Wi-Fi router. connection. ( pages 16, 67)
different input source. If playback is not paused, the Direct
If there is a metallic object near the AV receiver, wireless
Change function may select your iPod/iPhone as the input
LAN connection may not be possible as the metal can
source by mistake during the transition between tracks. effect on the radio wave.

En-80
Appendix

Music Server and Internet Radio The AV receiver supports USB devices that support the The u functions dont work
USB mass storage device class. However, playback may To use u, you must make an u connection and an
Cant access the server or Internet radio not be possible with some USB devices even if they analog audio connection (RCA) between the component
Certain network service or contents available through this conform to the USB mass storage device class. and AV receiver, even if they are connected digitally.
device may not be accessible in case the service provider ( page 89) ( page 20)
terminates its service. Depending on the type of format, the playback from a USB While Zone 2 is selected, the u functions dont work.
Check the network connection between the AV receiver device may not be performed normally. Check the type of ( page 20)
and your router or switch. ( page 16) the file formats that is supported. ( page 90)
USB memory devices with security functions cannot be The functions System On/Auto Power On and
Make sure that your modem and router are properly
played. Direct Change dont work for components
connected, and make sure they are both turned on.
connected via u
Make sure the server is up and running and compatible
with the AV receiver. ( page 89) Others These functions dont work when Zone 2 is turned on.
( page 20)
Check the Networksettings. ( page 67)
Standby power consumption When performing Automatic Speaker Setup, the
Playback stops while listening to music files on In the following cases, the power consumption in standby
measurement fails and the message Ambient
the server mode may reach up to a maximum of 8.6 W:
The HDMI CEC (RIHD) setting is set to On. noise is too high. is displayed.
Make sure your server is compatible with the AV receiver.
(Depending on the TV status, the AV receiver will enter This can be caused by a malfunction in your speaker unit.
( page 89)
standby mode as usual.) Check if the unit produces normal sounds.
If you download or copy large files on your computer,
playback may be interrupted. Try closing any unused The HDMI Through setting is set to other than Off. The following settings can be made for the
programs, use a more powerful computer, or use a The Network Standby setting is set to On. composite video inputs
dedicated server. ( pages 64, 65, 67)
You must use the buttons on the unit to make these
If the server is serving large music files to several If an MHL-enabled mobile device connected to HDMI IN 1 settings.
networked devices simultaneously, the network may is charged, the power consumption in standby mode will
become overloaded and playback may be interrupted. increase than the figure above. ( page 16) On the AV receiver, press the input selector for the
Reduce the number of playback devices on the network, input source that you want to set and the HOME
upgrade your network, or use a switch instead of a hub.
The sound changes when I connect my button simultaneously. While holding down the
headphones input selector button, press HOME until Video
Cant connect to the AV receiver from a Web When a pair of headphones is connected, the listening ATT :On appears on the AV receivers display.
browser mode is set to Stereo, unless its already set to Stereo,
Then, release both buttons. To turn the setting off,
If youre using DHCP, your router may not always allocate Mono, Direct, or Pure Audio (European, Australian and
Asian models). repeat the above process so that Video ATT :Off
the same IP address to the AV receiver, so if you find that
you cant connect to a server or Internet radio station, appears on the AV receivers display, and release
recheck the AV receivers IP address on the Network
The speaker distance cannot be set as required the buttons.
screen. ( page 67) The values entered may be automatically adjusted with Video Attenuation
values best-suited for your home theater.
Check the Network settings. ( page 67) This setting can be made for the BD/DVD,
The display doesnt work CBL/SAT, GAME, PC or AUX input.
USB Device Playback The display is turned off when the Pure Audio (European, If you have a game console connected to the
Australian and Asian models) listening mode is selected. composite video input, and the picture isnt very
Cant access the music files on a USB device How do I change the language of a multiplex clear, you can attenuate the gain.
Make sure the USB device is plugged in properly. Video ATT :Off: (default).
source
Use the Multiplex setting in the Audio Adjust menu to Video ATT :On: Gain is reduced by 2 dB.
select Main or Sub. ( page 57)

En-81
Appendix
If the picture on your TV/monitor connected to We assume no responsibility whatsoever for any
Radio Wave Caution
the HDMI output(s) is unstable, try switching the error or damage of network environment or access
DeepColor function off The AV receiver uses a 2.4 GHz radio wave device resulting from the use of this apparatus.
To turn off the DeepColor function, simultaneously frequency, which is a band used by other wireless Confirm with the provider or access device maker
press the GAME and 8ON/STANDBY buttons on systems as 1 and 2 described below. for more information.
the AV receiver. While holding down GAME, press 1. Devices which use a 2.4 GHz radio wave
8ON/STANDBY until Deep Color:Off appears frequency Scope of Operation
on the AV receivers display. Then, release both Cordless phones
buttons. To reactivate the DeepColor function, Use of the AV receiver is limited to home use.
Cordless facsimiles
repeat the above process until Deep Color:On (Transmission distances may be reduced depending
Microwave ovens
appears on the AV receivers display and release on communication environment.)
Wireless LAN devices (IEEE802.11b/g/n)
the buttons. In the following locations, poor condition or
Wireless AV equipment inability to receive radio waves may cause the
Wireless controllers for game systems audio to be interrupted or stopped:
Microwave oven-based health aids In reinforced concrete buildings or steel framed or
Video transmitter iron framed buildings.
Specific type of external monitor and LCD Near large metallic furniture.
display In a crowd of people or near a building or obstacle.
2. Less common devices which use a 2.4 GHz In a location exposed to the magnetic field, static
radio wave frequency electricity or radio wave interference from radio
Anti-theft systems communication equipment using the same
Amateur radio stations (HAM) frequency band (2.4 GHz) as the AV receiver, such
Warehouse logistic management systems as a 2.4 GHz wireless LAN device
Discrimination systems for train or emergency (IEEE802.11b/g/n) or microwave oven.
vehicles If you live in a heavily populated residential area
If these devices and the AV receiver are used at the (apartment, townhouse, etc.) and if your neighbors
same time, the audio may be undesirably stopped or microwave oven is placed near your AV receiver,
disturbed due to a radio wave interference. you may experience radio wave interference. If this
Suggestions for improvement occurs, move your AV receiver to a different place.
Switch off the devices which emit the radio When the microwave oven is not in use, there will be
wave. no radio wave interference.
Place the interfering devices away from the AV
receiver.
The AV receiver uses radio wave, and a third
person can receive the wave on purpose or
accidentally. Do not use the communication for
important or fatal matters.

En-82
Appendix
Electronic device which requires cautions
Radio Wave Reflections
Hearing aid, pace maker, other medical electronic
The radio waves received by the AV receiver include devices, fire alarm, automatic door, and other
the radio wave coming directly from the devices and automatic control device.
waves coming from various directions due to When using a pace maker or other medical electronic
reflections by walls, furniture and building (reflected devices, confirm with the medical electronic device
waves). The reflected waves (due to obstacles and maker or dealer for the effect of the radio wave.
reflecting objects) further produce a variety of
reflected waves as well as variation in reception
The AV receiver contains a microcomputer for
condition depending on locations. If the audio cannot
signal processing and control functions. In very rare
be received properly due to this phenomenon, try
situations, severe interference, noise from an
moving the location of the wireless LAN device a little.
external source, or static electricity may cause it to
Also note that audio may be interrupted due to the
lockup. In the unlikely event that this happens,
reflected waves when a person crosses or
unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait at
approaches the space between the AV receiver and
least five seconds, and then plug it back in.
the wireless LAN device.
We assume no responsibility whatsoever for any
damages resulting from the use of this apparatus Onkyo is not responsible for damages (such as CD
except in the cases deemed acceptable under the rental fees) due to unsuccessful recordings caused
applicable laws and regulations. by the units malfunction. Before you record
Operation in all environment is not guaranteed for important data, make sure that the material will be
wireless LAN. The communication may not be recorded correctly.
possible or have desirable communication speed.
Before disconnecting the power cord from the wall
Precautions outlet, set the AV receiver to standby.

Do not use this apparatus near an electronic device


handling high-accuracy controls or weak signals.
Doing so may cause an accident due to a
malfunction of the device.
Do not use this apparatus in use prohibited location
such as an aircraft equipment or a hospital. Doing
so may cause an accident due to a malfunction of
an electronic device or an electro-medical
apparatus. Follow the instructions of the medical
facilities.

En-83
Appendix
DISCLAIMER
Video Resolution Chart
Through this device you are able to link to other services or websites which are not under the
control of any company which has designed, manufactured or distributed/have distributed this The following tables show how video signals at different resolutions are output by
device, and its affiliates (collectively, Company). We have no control over the nature, content the AV receiver.
and availability of those services. The inclusion of any links does not necessarily imply a
: Output available
recommendation or endorse the views expressed within them.
All information, content and services available through this device belong to third parties and Output HDMI
Input 4K*1 1080p/24 1080p 1080i 720p 480p/576p 480i/576i
are protected by copyright, patent, trademark and/or other intellectual property laws of
HDMI 4K*2 *3
applicable countries. The information, content and services provided through this device are 1080p/24 *3
for your personal, noncommercial use only. Any information, content or services may not be 1080p *3
1080i *3
used in any manner other than previously approved by the appropriate content owner or
720p *3
service provider. 480p/576p *3
You may not modify, copy, republish, translate, exploit, create derivative works, upload, post, 480i/576i *3
Component 1080p
transmit, sell or distribute in any manner any information, content or services available
1080i
through this device, unless expressly permitted by the appropriate copyright, patent, 720p
trademark and/or other intellectual property owner, including, without limitation, content owner 480p/576p
480i/576i *3
or service provider.
Composite 480i/576i *3
THE CONTENT AND SERVICES AVAILABLE THROUGH THIS DEVICE ARE PROVIDED
AS IS. COMPANY DOES NOT WARRANT INFORMATION, CONTENT OR SERVICES SO s
Output Component Composite

PROVIDED, EITHER EXPRESSLY OR IMPLIEDLY, FOR ANY PURPOSE. Input 1080p 1080i 720p 480p/576p 480i/576i 480i/576i
HDMI 4K*2
COMPANY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, 1080p/24
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, 1080p
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. 1080i
720p
Company makes no representation or warranty of any kind, express or implied, about the 480p/576p
completeness, accuracy, validity, legality, reliability, suitability or availability with respect to 480i/576i
the information, content or services available through this device. Company shall not be liable, Component 1080p
1080i
whether in contract or tort, including negligence and strict liability, for any direct, indirect, 720p
special, incidental or consequential damages or any other damages arising out of, or in 480p/576p
connection with, any information contained in, or as a result of the use of any content or 480i/576i
Composite 480i/576i
service by you or any third party, even if Company has been advised of the possibility of such
damages, nor shall Company be liable for any third party claims against users of this device *1 Supported resolutions: [3840 2160 30 Hz], [3840 2160 25 Hz], [3840 2160 24 Hz],
or any third party.
[4096 2160 24 Hz]
In no event shall Company be responsible nor liable for, without limiting the generality of the *2 The AV receiver is compatible with HDMI IN 1 to HDMI IN 4. However, the number of the
foregoing, any interruption or suspension of any information, content or service available
player that outputs video signal at 4K resolution or the same level at the same time may
through this device. Company is neither responsible nor liable for customer service related to
be up to three.
the information, content and services available through this device. *3 Supported resolutions for HDMI OUT SUB.
Any question or request for service relating to the information, content or services should be
made directly to the appropriate content owners and services providers.

En-84
Appendix

Firmware Update Limitation of liability Before Starting


The program and accompanying online Set the HDMI CEC (RIHD) setting to Off
To update the firmware of the AV receiver, you can documentation are furnished to you for use at your ( page 64).
choose from the following two methods: update via own risk. Onkyo will not be liable and you will have
network, or update via USB storage. Choose the one Turn off the controller device connected via network.
no remedy for damages for any claim of any kind Turn off Multi Zone if this function is present.
that best suits your environment. Before proceeding whatsoever concerning your use of the program or
with the update, please read the corresponding Stop playback of contents from Internet Radio, USB
the accompanying online documentation,
explanations carefully. or servers, etc.
regardless of legal theory, and whether arising in
Update via network tort or contract. In no event will Onkyo be liable to Update Procedure
You need a Internet connection to update the you or any third party for any special, indirect,
firmware. incidental, or consequential damages of any kind,

Update via USB storage ( page 86)


including, but not limited to, compensation, 1 Press RECEIVER followed by HOME on the
remote controller.
reimbursement or damages on account of the loss
Please prepare a USB storage device such as a of present or prospective profits, loss of data, or for The Home menu appears on the TV screen.
USB flash memory stick. You need at least 32 MB any other reason whatsoever.
of available space to update the firmware. 2 Select Firmware Update and press ENTER.
Note that the Firmware Update option will be
See the Onkyo web site for latest information.
Note grayed out for a short while after the AV receiver
is turned on. Please wait until it becomes
Check the network connection before updating. Updating the Firmware via Network
Do not touch any cable or device connected to the AV
operable.
receiver during the update process.
Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC
The AV receiver allows you to update the firmware using 3 Select Update via NET and press ENTER.
network connection. Note that this option will not be available if there
while it is being updated. is no firmware file newer than the currently
Do not shutdown the power of the AV receiver while it is Note
installed version. If the AV receiver is not
being updated. Make sure your AV receiver and TV are turned on and the
The storage media in the USB card reader may not work.
connected to the internet, Update via NET is
AV receiver is connected to the Internet.
If the USB device is partitioned, each section will be treated Never unplug or turn off the AV receiver while it is being
not displayed.
as an independent device.
If the USB device contains a lot of data, the AV receiver
updated.
Never plug or unplug an HDMI or Ethernet cable during the
4 Select Update and press ENTER.
The update process will begin.
may take a while to read it. update process.
Operation is not guaranteed for all USB devices, which
During the update process, the on-screen display
Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC
includes the ability to power them. while it is being updated.
may disappear depending on the updated
Onkyo takes no responsibility whatsoever for the loss or Never unplug the power cord during the update process. program. When this occurs, you can still view the
damage of data resulting from the use of a USB device with It takes up to 20 minutes to complete the firmware update. update progress on the AV receivers display.
the AV receiver. Onkyo recommends that you back up your The AV receiver will retain all your settings after the update The on-screen display will reappear after the
important music files beforehand. is finished. update is complete, and upon turning the AV
If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the USB port, receiver off and on again.
Onkyo recommends that you use its AC adapter to power it.
USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are not 5 The message Completed! appears on the AV
receivers display, indicating that the update
supported. Do not connect your USB device via a USB hub.
USB devices with security functions are not supported. has been completed.

Operating
procedure
En-85 ( page 52)
Appendix
Troubleshooting Case 2:
6 Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel.
If an error occurs during the update process,
The AV receiver will enter standby mode. Case 1: disconnect then reconnect the AC power cord and try
Do not use 8RECEIVER on the remote If an error occurs, Error!! *-** is displayed on the AV again.
controller. receivers display. (Alpha-numeric characters on the
The AV receiver will enter standby mode front display are denoted by asterisks.) Refer to the Case 3:
automatically in 3 minutes regardless of whether following table and take appropriate action. If you do not have an Internet connection to the
8ON/STANDBY is pressed. network, please contact Onkyo Support.
Errors during an update via network
Congratulations! You now have the latest
firmware installed on your Onkyo AV receiver. Error Code Description
*-01, *-10 The Ethernet cable was not detected.
Updating the Firmware via USB
Reconnect the cable properly.
The AV receiver allows you to update the firmware
*-02, *-03, Internet connection error. using a USB device.
*-04, *-05, Check the following items:
*-06, *-11, Make sure the IP address, subnet mask, Note
*-13, *-14, gateway address, and DNS server are Never unplug or turn off the AV receiver during the update
*-16, *-17, configured properly. process.
*-18, *-20, Make sure the router is turned on. Never plug or unplug an HDMI cable or a USB device
*-21 Make sure the AV receiver and the router during the update process.
are connected with an Ethernet cable. Never unplug the USB storage device containing the
Make sure your router is configured firmware file or the AC power cord during the update
properly. See the instruction manual of process.
the router. Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC
If your network allows only one client while it is being updated.
connection and there is any other device It takes up to 20 minutes to complete the firmware update.
already connected, the AV receiver will The AV receiver will retain all your settings after the update
not be able to access the network. is finished.
Consult your Internet Service Provider
(ISP).
Before Starting
If your modem does not function as a
router, you will need a router. Depending Set the HDMI CEC (RIHD) setting to Off
on your network, you may need to ( page 64).
configure the proxy server if necessary.
Turn off the controller device connected via network.
See the document provided by your ISP.
If you are still unable to access the Turn off Multi Zone if this function is present.
Internet, the DNS or proxy server may be Stop playback of contents from Internet Radio, USB
temporarily down. Contact your ISP. or servers, etc.
Others Retry the update procedure from the If there is any data in the USB device, remove it first.
beginning. If the error persists, please
contact Onkyo Support and provide the
error code.

Operating
procedure
En-86 ( page 52)
Appendix
Update Procedure Troubleshooting
10 Select Update and press ENTER.
The update process will begin. Case 1:
During the update process, the on-screen display
1 Connect a USB device to your PC. If there is
any data in the USB device, remove it first. may disappear depending on the updated
If an error occurs, Error!! *-** is displayed on the AV
receivers display. (Alpha-numeric characters on the
program. When this occurs, you can still view the front display are denoted by asterisks.) Refer to the
2 Download the firmware file from the Onkyo
web site. The file name is as follows:
update progress on the AV receivers display. following table and take appropriate action.
The on-screen display will reappear after the
ONKAVR****_************.zip Errors during an update via USB
update is complete, and upon turning the AV
Unzip the downloaded file. The numbers of receiver off and on again. Error Code Description
folders and files differ according to the model. Do not turn off the AV receiver and do not *-01, *-10 The USB device was not detected. Make
remove the USB device during the update
3 Copy all the extracted folders including all
folders and files to the root folder of the USB process.
sure the USB flash memory or USB cable is
properly connected to the USB port. If the
device. Be careful not to copy the zip file. USB storage device has its own power
11 The message Completed! appears on the AV
receivers display, indicating that the update
supply, use it to power the USB device.
4 Remove the USB device from your PC and
connect it to the USB port on the AV receiver. has been completed.
*-05, *-13, The firmware file was not found in the root
*-20, *-21 folder of the USB device, or the firmware
Remove the USB device. file is for another model. Retry and
5 Make sure the AV receiver and TV are turned
download the file on the support page of
on. 12 Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel.
the web site, following the on-site
If the AV receiver is in standby mode, press The AV receiver will enter standby mode. instructions. If the error persists, please
8ON/STANDBY on the AV receiver to light up Do not use 8RECEIVER on the remote contact Onkyo Support and provide the
the front display. controller. error code.
The AV receiver will enter standby mode Others Retry the update procedure from the
6 Select the USB input source.
automatically in 3 minutes regardless of whether beginning. If the error persists, please
Now Initializing... appears on the AV receivers contact Onkyo Support and provide the
display and then the name of the USB device is 8ON/STANDBY is pressed. error code.
displayed. It takes 20 to 30 seconds to recognize Congratulations! You now have the latest
the USB device. firmware installed on your Onkyo AV receiver. Case 2:
If an error occurs during the update process,
7 Press RECEIVER followed by HOME on the
remote controller.
disconnect then reconnect the AC power cord and try
again.
The Home menu appears on the TV screen.

8 Select Firmware Update and press ENTER.

9 Select Update via USB and press ENTER.


Note that this option will not be available if there
is no firmware file newer than the currently
installed version. If the AV receiver is not
connected to the internet, Update via USB is
not displayed.

Operating
procedure
En-87 ( page 52)
Appendix

About HDMI Supported Audio Formats About Copyright Protection


Designed to meet the increased demands of digital 2-channel linear PCM (32192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit) The AV receiver supports HDCP (High-bandwidth
TV, HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a Multichannel linear PCM (up to 7.1 ch, 32192 kHz, Digital Content Protection)*2, a copy-protection
new digital interface standard for connecting TVs, 16/20/24 bit) system for digital video signals. Other devices
projectors, Blu-ray Disc/DVD players, set-top boxes, Bitstream (DSD, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, connected to the AV receiver via HDMI must also
and other video components. Until now, several Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution support HDCP.
separate video and audio cables have been required Audio, DTS-HD Master Audio)
to connect AV components. With HDMI, a single Your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player must also support
cable can carry control signals, digital video, and up HDMI output of the above audio formats. *1 DVI (Digital Visual Interface): The digital display interface
to eight channels of digital audio (2-channel PCM, standard set by the DDWG*3 in 1999.
multichannel digital audio, and multichannel PCM). *2 HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection): The
The HDMI video stream (i.e., video signal) is video encryption technology developed by Intel for
compatible with DVI (Digital Visual Interface)*1, so HDMI/DVI. Its designed to protect video content and
requires a HDCP-compatible device to display the
TVs and displays with a DVI input can be connected
encrypted video.
by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (This may *3 DDWG (Digital Display Working Group): Lead by Intel,
not work with some TVs and displays, resulting in no Compaq, Fujitsu, Hewlett Packard, IBM, NEC, and
picture.) Silicon Image, this open industry groups objective is to
The AV receiver uses HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital address the industrys requirements for a digital
Content Protection)*2, so only HDCP-compatible connectivity specification for high-performance PCs and
components can display the picture. digital displays.

The AV receivers HDMI interface is based on the Note


following: The HDMI video stream is compatible with DVI (Digital
Audio Return Channel, 3D, x.v.Color, DeepColor, Lip Visual Interface), so TVs and displays with a DVI input can
Sync, 4K (up-scaling and Passthrough), DTS-HD be connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable.
Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, Dolby (Note that DVI connections only carry video, so youll need
TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DSD and Multichannel to make a separate connection for audio.) However,
PCM. reliable operation with such an adapter is not guaranteed.
In addition, video signals from a PC are not supported.
The HDMI audio signal (sampling rate, bit length, etc.) may
be restricted by the connected source component. If the
picture is poor or theres no sound from a component
connected via HDMI, check its setup. Refer to the
connected components instruction manual for details.

En-88
Appendix

Network/USB Features modem, etc.). Please consult your ISP or computer


dealer if youre unsure.
The setting varies depending on the media server or
controller devices. Refer to your devices instruction
manual for details.
Note
Network Requirements If the operating system of your personal computer is
To receive Internet radio with the AV receiver, your
Windows 8/Windows 7, Windows Media Player 12 is
Ethernet Network broadband Internet connection must be working and able to
access the Web. Consult your ISP if you have any problems already installed. For more information, see the
For the best results, a 100Base-TX switched Ethernet Microsoft web site.
with your Internet connection.
network is recommended. Although its possible to
The AV receiver uses DHCP to configure its network
play music on a computer thats connected to the settings automatically. If you want to configure these
network wirelessly, playback may be unreliable, so it USB Device Requirements
settings manually, see Network ( page 67).
is recommended to use wired connections. The AV receiver does not support PPPoE settings, so if you USB mass storage device class (but not always
have a PPPoE-type Internet connection, you must use a
Ethernet Router guaranteed).
PPPoE-compatible router.
A router manages the network, data-routing and FAT16 or FAT32 file system format.
Depending on your ISP, you may need to specify a proxy
supplying of IP addresses. Your router must support server to use Internet radio. If your computer is configured If the storage device has been partitioned, each
the following: to use a proxy server, use the same settings for the AV section will be treated as an independent device.
NAT (Network Address Translation). NAT allows receiver ( page 67). Up to 20,000 folders can be displayed, and folders
several networked computers to access the Internet may be nested up to 16 levels deep.
simultaneously via a single Internet connection. The Server Requirements USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are
AV receiver needs Internet access for Internet radio. not supported.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). Server playback
Note
DHCP supplies IP addresses to the network The AV receiver can play digital music files stored on
If the media you connect is not supported, the message No
devices, allowing them to configure themselves a computer or media server and supports the
Storage will be displayed.
automatically. following technologies: If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the AV receivers
A router with a built-in 100Base-TX switch is Windows Media Player 11 USB port, we recommend that you use its AC adapter to
recommended. Windows Media Player 12 power it.
Some routers have a built-in modem, and some DLNA-certified media server The AV receiver supports USB MP3 players that support
Internet Service Providers (ISP) require you to use The computer or media server must be on the same the USB Mass Storage Class standard, which allows USB
specific routers. Please consult your ISP or computer devices to be connected to computers without the need for
network as the AV receiver.
special drivers or software. Note that not all USB MP3
dealer if youre unsure. Up to 20,000 folders can be displayed, and folders players support the USB Mass Storage Class standard.
CAT5 Ethernet cable may be nested up to 16 levels deep. Refer to your USB MP3 players instruction manual for
Use a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable (straight-type) to Note details.
Protected WMA music files on an MP3 player cannot be
connect the AV receiver to your home network. Depending on the media server, the AV receiver may not played.
recognize it, or may not be able to play its music files.
Internet Access (for Internet radio) Onkyo accepts no responsibility whatsoever for the loss or
To receive Internet radio, your Ethernet network must Remote playback damage to data stored on a USB device when that device
is used with the AV receiver. We recommend that you back
have Internet access. A narrowband Internet Windows Media Player 12
up your important music files beforehand.
connection (e.g., 56K modem, ISDN) will not provide DLNA-certified (within DLNA Interoperability MP3 players containing music files that are managed with
satisfactory results, so a broadband connection is Guidelines version 1.5) media server or controller special music software are not supported.
strongly recommended (e.g., cable modem, xDSL device.

En-89
Appendix
Operation is not guaranteed for all USB devices, which WMA Lossless (.wma or .WMA) LPCM (Linear PCM)
includes the ability to power them. Sampling rates of 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
Do not connect your USB device via a USB hub. The USB 96 kHz are supported. 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
device must be connected directly to the AV receivers USB
Quantization bit: 16 bit, 24 bit 48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz and 96 kHz are
port.
supported.
If the USB device contains a lot of data, the AV receiver WAV (.wav or .WAV)
make take a while to read it. Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit
WAV files contain uncompressed PCM digital audio. * Only for playback via network.
USB devices with security functions cannot be played.
Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, Apple Lossless (.m4a/.mp4/.M4A/.MP4)
Supported Audio File Formats 48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz and Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
192 kHz are supported. 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
For server playback and playback from a USB device,
Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit 48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz and 96 kHz are
the AV receiver supports the following music file
* For playback from a USB device, sampling rates of supported.
formats.
176.4 kHz and 192 kHz are not supported. Quantization bit: 16 bit, 24 bit
Variable bit-rate (VBR) files are supported. However,
playback times may not display correctly. AAC DSD (.dsf or .DSF)
Note (.aac/.m4a/.mp4/.3gp/.3g2/.AAC/.M4A/.MP4/ The sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz is supported.
.3GP or .3G2)
With remote playback, the AV receiver does not support the Dolby TrueHD (.vr/.mlp/.VR/.MLP)
following music file formats: FLAC, Ogg Vorbis, DSD and AAC stands for MPEG-2/MPEG-4 Audio.
Sampling rates of 48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz,
Dolby TrueHD. Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
96 kHz, 176.4 kHz and 192 kHz are supported.
In the case of server playback, the above-mentioned file 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
* For playback from a USB device, sampling rates only of
formats may not be played depending on the server type. 48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz and bitrates of
48 kHz and 64 kHz are supported.
between 8 kbps and 320 kbps are supported.
MP3 (.mp3 or .MP3)
MP3 files must be MPEG-1/MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3 FLAC (.flac or .FLAC) About DLNA
format with sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data
12 kHz, 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, compression. The Digital Living Network Alliance is an international,
44.1 kHz, 48 kHz and bitrates of between 8 kbps Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, cross-industry collaboration. Members of DLNA
and 320 kbps. Incompatible files cannot be played. 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, develop a concept of wired and wireless interoperable
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz and networks where digital content such as photos,
WMA (.wma or .WMA) music, and videos can be shared through consumer
192 kHz are supported.
WMA stands for Windows Media Audio and is an electronics, personal computers, and mobile devices
audio compression technology developed by Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit
in and beyond the home. The AV receiver complies
Microsoft Corporation. Audio can be encoded in WMA Ogg Vorbis (.ogg or .OGG) with the DLNA Interoperability Guidelines version 1.5.
format by using Windows Media Player. Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
WMA files must have the copyright option turned off. 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 48 kHz and bitrates of between 48 kbps and
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 500 kbps are supported. Incompatible files cannot
48 kHz, bitrates of between 5 kbps and 320 kbps, be played.
and WMA DRM are supported.
WMA Pro/Voice formats are not supported.

En-90
Appendix

License and Trademark


Information
x.v.Color is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

MHL, the MHL Logo, and Mobile High-Definition Link are


InstaPrevue and the InstaPrevue logo are trademarks or trademarks or registered trademarks of MHL LLC in the
registered trademarks of Silicon Image, Inc. in the United United States and other counties.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos:
States and other countries.
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872;
7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the Symbol, Apple, iPod and iPhone are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
& DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered registered in the U.S. and other countries.
trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a trademark of The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of the
DTS, Inc. Product includes software. DTS, Inc. All Rights Apple TV is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the Wi-Fi Alliance.
Reserved. U.S. and other countries. Wi-Fi certified logo shows international association
certifying interoperability Wi-Fi Alliance ensures the
product has passed the test for compatibility with other
Wi-Fi certified equipment.

Manufactured under license from


Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Audyssey Laboratories,Inc. U.S. and foreign patents
Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks pending. Audyssey MultEQ, Audyssey Dynamic EQ and
of Dolby Laboratories. Audyssey Dynamic Volume are registered trademarks of The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered
Audyssey Laboratories,Inc. trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
Music Optimizer and WRAT are trademarks of Onkyo such marks by Onkyo is under license. Other trademarks
Corporation. DLNA, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED are and trade names are those of their respective owners.
trademarks, service marks, or certification marks of the
Digital Living Network Alliance. Onkyo does not guarantee Bluetooth compatibility between
the AV receiver and all Bluetooth-enabled devices.
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from For compatibility between the AV receiver and another
Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. device with Bluetooth technology, consult the devices
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States documentation and dealer. In some countries, there may
and other countries. be restrictions on using Bluetooth devices. Check with your
This product is protected by certain intellectual property
local authorities.
rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology
outside of this product is prohibited without a license from
Microsoft.

Windows and the Windows logo are trademarks of the


Microsoft group of companies.

Qdeo and QuietVideo are trademarks of Marvell or its


affiliates.

En-91
Appendix

Specifications Speaker Impedance 6 - 16


(North American and Taiwanese)
Bluetooth Section
4 - 16 (Others)
Communication system
Amplifier Section Bluetooth Specification version 2.1 +
Video Section EDR (Enhanced Data Rate)
Rated Output Power Maximum communication range
All channels: 95 watts minimum continuous power Input Sensitivity/Output Level and Impedance Line of sight approx. 15 m*1
per channel, 8 ohm loads, 2 channels 1 Vp-p/75 (Component Y) Frequency band 2.4 GHz band (2.4000 GHz -
driven from 20 Hz to 20 kHz, with a 0.7 Vp-p/75 (Component PB/CB, 2.4835 GHz)
maximum total harmonic distortion of PR/CR)
0.08% (FTC) 1 Vp-p/75 (Composite) Modulation method FHSS (Freq Hopping Spread Spectrum)
115 watts minimum continuous power Component Video Frequency Response Compatible Bluetooth profiles
per channel, 6 ohm loads, 2 channels A2DP 1.2 (Advanced Audio Distribution
driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total 5 Hz - 100 MHz/+0 dB, 3 dB
Profile)
harmonic distortion of 0.7% (FTC) AVRCP 1.3 (Audio Video Remote
(North American) Tuner Section Control Profile)
7 ch 160 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch Supported Codecs SBC
driven of 1% (IEC)
(Others) FM Tuning Frequency Range Transmission range (A2DP)
Maximum Effective Output Power 87.5 MHz - 107.9 MHz 20 Hz - 20,000 Hz (Sampling frequency
(North American and Taiwanese) 44.1 kHz)
7 ch 175 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch 87.5 MHz - 108.0 MHz, RDS (Others)
driven (JEITA)
(Asian) AM Tuning Frequency Range *1 The actual range will vary depending on factors such as
522/530 kHz - 1611/1710 kHz obstacles between devices, magnetic fields around a
Dynamic Power*
* IEC60268-Short-term maximum output power Preset Channel 40 microwave oven, static electricity, cordless phone,
240 W (3 , Front) reception sensitivity, antennas performance, operating
210 W (4 , Front) Network Section system, software application, etc.
120 W (8 , Front)
THD+N (Total Harmonic Distortion+Noise) Ethernet LAN 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
0.08% (20 Hz - 20 kHz, half power) Wireless LAN
Damping Factor 60 (Front, 1 kHz, 8 ) Compatible standards:
Input Sensitivity and Impedance (Unbalance) IEEE 802.11 b/g/n standard (Wi-Fi
200 mV/47 k (LINE) standard)
2.5 mV/47 k (PHONO MM) Security: WEP 64 bit, WEP 128 bit, WPA/WPA2-
Rated RCA Output Level and Impedance PSK (AES), WPA/WPA2-PSK (TKIP)
200 mV/2.2 k (LINE OUT) Transmission frequency
Maximum RCA Output Level and Impedance 1 - 11 ch (North American and
Taiwanese)
2 V/2.2 k (LINE OUT)
10 - 13 ch (France)
Phono Overload 70 mV (MM 1 kHz 0.5% Direct) 1 - 13 ch (Others)
Frequency Response 5 Hz - 100 kHz/+1 dB, 3 dB (Direct (Wi-Fi standard)
mode) Radio frequency 2.4 GHz
Tone Control Characteristics
10 dB, 30 Hz (BASS)
10 dB, 20 kHz (TREBLE)
Signal to Noise Ratio 106 dB (LINE, IHF-A)
80 dB (PHONO MM, IHF-A)

En-92
Appendix
General Audio Outputs
Analog ZONE2 LINE OUT
Power Supply AC 120 V, 60 Hz
(North American and Taiwanese) Subwoofer Pre Outputs
AC 220 - 240 V, 50/60 Hz (Others) 2
Power Consumption 6.3 A (North American and Taiwanese) Speaker Outputs Main (L, R, C, SL, SR, SBL/FHL,
600 W (Others) SBR/FHR) + ZONE2 (L, R)
No-sound Power Consumption Phones 1 ( 6.3)
85 W (North American and Taiwanese)
70 W (European and Australian) Others
70 W (230 V)
80 W (240 V) Setup Mic 1
(Others) RI 1
Stand-by Power Consumption USB 1 (Front)
0.15 W (North American and Taiwanese) Ethernet 1
0.2 W (Others)
Dimensions (W H D) Specifications and features are subject to change
435 mm 173.5 mm 328 mm without notice.
17-1/8" 6-13/16" 12-15/16"
Weight 9.8 kg (21.6 lbs.)
(North American and Taiwanese)
10.0 kg (22.0 lbs.) (Others)

HDMI
Input IN 1, IN 2, IN 3, IN 4, IN 5, IN 6
Output OUT MAIN, OUT SUB
Video Resolution 4K
Audio Format Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio,
DVD-Audio, DSD
Supported 3D, Audio Return Channel, DeepColor,
x.v.Color, LipSync, CEC (RIHD), 4K (up-
scaling and Passthrough)

Video Inputs
Component IN
Composite BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, GAME, PC, AUX

Video Outputs
Component OUT
Composite MONITOR OUT

Audio Inputs
Digital Optical: 1
Coaxial: 2
Analog BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, GAME, PC, TV/CD,
PHONO, AUX

En-93
Appendix

Memo

En-94
Appendix

Memo

En-95
2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN
http://www.onkyo.com/
The Americas

18 Park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.


For Dealer, Service, Order and all other Business Inquiries:
Tel: 201-785-2600 Fax: 201-785-2650
http://www.us.onkyo.com/
For Product Support Team Only:
1-800-229-1687
http://www.us.onkyo.com/
Europe

Liegnitzerstrasse 6, 82194 Groebenzell, GERMANY


Tel: +49-8142-4401-0 Fax: +49-8142-4208-213
http://www.eu.onkyo.com/

Unit 19, Building 6, Croxley Green Business Park, Hatters Lane, Watford, WD18 8YH, UK
Tel: +44 (0)8712-00-19-96 Fax: +44 (0)8712-00-19-95
China
(Hong Kong)
Unit 1033, 10/F, Star House, No 3, Salisbury Road, Tsim Sha Tsui Kowloon, Hong Kong.
Tel: 852-2429-3118 Fax: 852-2428-9039
http://www.hk.onkyo.com/
(Mainland)
1301, 555 Tower, No.555 West NanJing Road, Jingan District, Shanghai, China 200041,
Tel: 86-21-52131366 Fax: 86-21-52130396
http://www.cn.onkyo.com/
Asia, Oceania, Middle East, Africa
Please contact an Onkyo distributor referring to Onkyo SUPPORT site.
http://www.intl.onkyo.com/support/
The above-mentioned information is subject to change without prior notice.
Visit the Onkyo web site for the latest update.

Y1303-3

SN 29401412EN-B
(C) Copyright 2013 Onkyo Corporation Japan. All rights reserved.
* 2 9 4 0 1 4 1 2 E N - B *
Using Internet Radio

Using Internet Radio Using Multiple Accounts


The AV receiver supports multiple user accounts,
Pandora internet radio
Getting Started (U.S. only)..................... 2
which means you can freely switch between several
Common Procedures in Internet Radio logins. After registering user accounts, login is
Menu performed from the Users screen.
Using Rhapsody (U.S. only).......................... 3
Note
1 Press MENU while the Users screen is
displayed.
Available services may vary depending on the region.
Certain network service or contents available through this The following menu items appear: Using the SiriusXM Internet Radio
device may not be accessible in case the service provider Add new user: (North American only).............................. 4
terminates its service.
Remove this user:
You can either store a new user account, or
1 Press NET. delete an existing one. Using Last.fm Internet Radio ........................ 5
A list of the network services appears, and the
NET indicator lights. If it flashes, verify that the
Tip
Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV
receiver. Some of the services dont allow the use of multiple user
Using Slacker Personal Radio ...................... 6
accounts.
2 Select the desired service and press ENTER. You can store up to 10 user accounts.
The top page of the selected service appears. To switch between accounts you must first log out from the
current account, and log in again on the Users screen.
Using MP3tunes ............................................. 7

En-1
Using Internet Radio

Pandora internet radio 2 To play a station, use q/w to select the station Delete this station:
Getting Started (U.S. only) from your station list, and then press ENTER. This will permanently delete a station from your
Playback starts and the playback screen Pandora account. All of your thumbs feedback
Pandora is a free, personalized Internet radio service appears. will be lost should you choose to re-create the
that plays the music you know and helps you discover Create a New Station: station with the same track or artist.
music youll love. Enter the name of a track, artist, or genre and Create station from this track:
Pandora will create a unique radio station for you Creates a radio station from this track.
1 Use q/w to select I have a Pandora Account based on the musical qualities of that track, artist, Rename this station:
or Im new to Pandora and then press or genre. Lets you rename the current radio station.
ENTER.
Menu Items Bookmark this artist:
If you are new to Pandora select Im new to
I like this track: Pandora will bookmark your favorite artist for
Pandora. You will see an activation code on
your profile on www.pandora.com.
your TV screen. Please write down this code. Go Give a track thumbs-up and Pandora will play
more music like it. Bookmark this track:
to an Internet connected computer and point your
browser to www.pandora.com/onkyo I dont like this track: Pandora will bookmark the current track and
allow you to buy them all from Amazon or iTunes
Enter your activation code and then follow the Give a track thumbs-down and Pandora will ban
in one step!
instructions to create your Pandora account and that track from the current station.
your personalized Pandora Internet radio Add to My Favorites:
Why is this track playing?:
stations. You can create your stations by entering Adds a station to My Favorites list.
Discover some of the musical attributes that
your favorite tracks and artists when prompted. Pandora uses to create your personal radio
After you have created your account and stations stations.
you can return to your Onkyo receiver and press Im tired of this track: PANDORA, the PANDORA logo, and the Pandora
enter to begin listening to your personalized If you are tired of a track, you can put the track to trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks
Pandora Internet radio. sleep and Pandora will not play it for one month. of Pandora Media, Inc. Used with permission.
If you have an existing Pandora account, you can Create station from this artist:
add your Pandora account to your Onkyo
Creates a radio station from this artist.
receiver by selecting I have a Pandora
Account and logging in with your email and
password.
Tip
If you want to use multiple user accounts, see Using
Multiple Accounts ( page 1). Login can be made
from the Users screen.

En-2
Using Internet Radio

Using Rhapsody (U.S. only) 2 Use q/w to select the menu, then press 3 Use q/w to select a channel, and press ENTER
ENTER. or 1 to start playback.
1 Use q/w to select Sign in to your account Search: Playback starts and the playback screen
and then press ENTER. You can search for music by Artist, Album, or appears.
To use Rhapsody, you need an account. If you Track. You can control the tracks with the buttons on the
dont have one yet, you can create a new Music Guide: remote control.
account at You can play tracks from Genres, Top Artists, Enabled buttons: 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7,
www.rhapsody.com/onkyo Top Albums, Top Tracks, New Releases, and 6, RANDOM, REPEAT
If you have an existing Rhapsody account, select Staff Picks.
Sign in to your account and press ENTER. Note
Rhapsody Channels:
Enter your user name (usually your email) and Listen to radio channels programmed by On Rhapsody Channels, some of the buttons dont
password in the next keyboard screen, or in Web work.
Rhapsodys top-notch editors.
Setup. Playlists: Menu Items
Using the keyboard screen Play your own personal playlists. Add track to My Library:
1. Use q/w/e/r and ENTER to enter your user My Library: Bookmark currently-playing tracks.
name and password. Bookmark your favorite albums and tracks from Add album to My Library:
2. Select OK. the Rhapsody catalog using My Library. Bookmark currently-playing albums.
3. Press ENTER. The Confirm your entries Account Info: Add playlist to My Library:
screen appears. Confirm your account information. Bookmark currently-playing playlists.
4. Press ENTER. Sign Out: Add channel to My Channels:
Sign out from your Rhapsody account. Bookmark currently-playing Rhapsody radio
Tip
channels.
If you want to use multiple user accounts, see Using
Multiple Accounts ( page 1). Login can be made Add to My Favorites:
from the Users screen. Adds a track, channel or playlist to My Favorites
list.
Tip
You can remove bookmarked tracks, albums, and
Rhapsody Channels from My Library.

En-3
Using Internet Radio

Using the SiriusXM Internet Radio 1 Use q/w to select Sign In, and then press 3 Use q/w to select the desired channel and then
(North American only) ENTER. press ENTER.
If you have an existing SIRIUS account, you can The playback screen for the selected channel
Your Onkyo AV receiver includes a free trial of sign in by selecting Sign In. Enter your user appears and you can listen to SiriusXM Internet
SiriusXM Internet Radio. The Account Info screen name and password in the next keyboard screen, Radio.
shows how many days are left in your trial. After the or in Web Setup. If you dont know your You can control the tracks with the buttons on the
trial period expires, if you want to continue listening to username or password, call Sirius XM at (888) remote control.
the service, you must subscribe. To subscribe go to 539-7474 for assistance. Enabled buttons: 2, 3, 7, 6
www.siriusxm.com/internetradio with your
Tip
computer. Menu Items
If you want to use multiple user accounts, see Using Add to My Favorites:
Multiple Accounts ( page 1). Login can be made
When you subscribe, you will be provided with a from the Users screen.
Adds a channel to My Favorites list.
username and password which has to be entered into
the AV receiver. Using the keyboard screen
1. Use q/w/e/r and ENTER to enter your user
To use SiriusXM Internet Radio, you must have your name and password. SiriusXM Internet Radio subscriptions are sold
AV receiver connected to the Internet. Using the 2. Select OK. separately and are governed by the Sirius Terms and
remote control, follow these steps: 3. Press ENTER. The Confirm your entries Conditions (see www.sirius.com). Be sure to read this
screen appears. agreement before you purchase your subscription.
4. Press ENTER. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are
Please wait... appears and then SiriusXM trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its
Internet Radio screen appears which displays subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
the category available for selection.

2 Use q/w to select the category and then press


ENTER.
The channel list screen for the selected category
appears.

En-4
Using Internet Radio

Using Last.fm Internet Radio 1 Use q/w to select Sign in to your account, Profile:
and then press ENTER. You can play tracks from Recently Listened
Last.fm is a music service that learns what you If you have the existing Last.fm account, you can Tracks, Library and Neighbours.
love... sign in to your account to select Sign in to your Account Info:
Your new Onkyo AV receiver is very clever. If you account. Enter your user name and password in Confirm your account information.
have a free Last.fm account, it will keep track of all the next keyboard screen. Sign Out:
the songs youve just played. When you visit the
Using the keyboard screen It signs out from your account.
Last.fm website, you can see personal charts of the
music youve enjoyed, share them with friends and 1. Use q/w/e/r and the ENTER to enter your 3 Use q/w to select a station, and press ENTER
see what they like, too. user name and password. or 1 to start playback.
2. Select OK. Playback starts and the playback screen
With thousands of biographies, reviews and an 3. Press ENTER. The Confirm your entries appears.
endless choice of personalised, ad-free radio screen appears.
Menu Items
stations, Last.fm is a great way to discover music. 4. Press ENTER.
I Love this track:
Pick up your free Last.fm account today at Please wait... appears and then Last.fm
www.last.fm/join Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and
Internet Radio screen appears.
playback frequency increases.
Tip Ban this track:
Get a subscription and you can enjoy the best of ad-
If you want to use multiple user accounts, see Using Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and
free Last.fm Radio on your Onkyo AV receiver without
Multiple Accounts ( page 1). Login can be made playback frequency reduces.
a computer! from the Users screen.
Recommended Radio: Add to My Favorites:
Discover smart personalised recommendations that 2 Use q/w to select menu and then press Adds a station to My Favorites list.
adapt as your tastes change. ENTER.
Search Station: Using scrobbling control
Artist Radio:
Pick any artist and well play you a whole station of You can search station by Artist, Tag, or User Use q/w to select Enable, and then press ENTER.
music inspired by your choice. Name. * Internet radio services provided by a third party may be
My Library: Top Artists Station: terminated with or without notice.
Sit back and enjoy selections from all the music You can play tracks of top-rated artists. Internet radio services may not be available in some areas.
youve heard since you joined Last.fm. Top Tags Station:
Tag Radio: You can play tracks of top-rated tags.
Polish funk? Death pop? Think of a style and well Personal Station:
entertain you with it for hours. You can play tracks from personalized station
(Your Library, Your Neighbourhood and
Start your free trial straight away when you create Your Recommendations).
your account and see for yourself what its like to
have the worlds music at your fingertips. Latest
prices and full information are available at
www.last.fm/subscribe

En-5
Using Internet Radio

Using Slacker Personal Radio 6 You can control the tracks with the buttons on
the remote control.
1 If you do not have an account, create one on
the Slacker website (www.slacker.com) with
Enabled buttons: 1, 3, 2, 6

your computer. Menu Items


Rate Song as Favorite:
If you already have a Slacker account, select
Stores information to server, making it more likely
Sign in to your account and then press
that the song will be played again.
ENTER.
Ban Song:
The keyboard screen appears. You can enter
Stores information to server, making it less likely
information from the remote control or the keys
that the song will be played again.
on the main unit.
Ban Artist:
2 If there are no mistakes in the information you Stores information to server, making it less likely
have entered, use q/w/e/r to select OK that the songs from this artist will be played
then press ENTER. again.
An account information confirmation screen Mark Favorite:
appears. Adds the currently playing station to your
3 If you do not have an account, select Access
without Sign In and press ENTER to use a
favorites.
Unmark Favorite:
restricted version of the service. Deletes the currently playing station from your
Note that use will be restricted. favorites.
Tip Add song to Library:
If you want to use multiple user accounts, see Using Adds the currently playing track to your library.
Multiple Accounts ( page 1). Login can be made Delete song from Library:
from the Users screen. Deletes the currently playing track from your
library.
4 Use q/w to select a menu item and then press
Add to My Favorites:
ENTER.
Adds a station or song to My Favorites list.
To sign out, use q/w to select Sign out from
this screen and then press ENTER.

5 Use q/w to select a station and then press


ENTER or 1 to start playback from the
station.
The playback screen appears.

En-6
Using Internet Radio

Using MP3tunes Playing Contents on the AV Receiver The track at the top of the music list is automatically
played back.
Listen to your music collection on your home stereo in Tip
complete digital fidelity without a personal computer Before proceeding, you need to select the MP3tunes 5 Use q/w to select a track and press ENTER or
plus safely backup all your songs. Heres how: service as described in Common Procedures in Internet 1 to start playback.
Radio Menu ( page 1). A playback screen appears.
Creating an Account on your Computer You can control the tracks with the buttons on the
1 Use q/w to select Sign in to your account, remote control.
and then press ENTER. Enabled buttons: 1, 3, 2, 7, 6
1 From your computer, open a web browser and
go to: www.mp3tunes.com/signup 2 Enter the e-mail address and password you Menu Items
used when creating your account, select OK Go to Menu:
2 Create an account. and press ENTER.
Displays additional menu options.
The keyboard screen appears. You can enter
3 Click the Upload link
(www.mp3tunes.com/upload) to add files to
your user name and password from the remote 6 You can view or change your MP3tunes
controller or the buttons on the AV receiver. account settings by going to
your Locker. www.mp3tunes.com/account.
4 View, edit and listen to your files by clicking 3 If there are no mistakes in the information you
have entered, select OK and press ENTER.
on Player (www.mp3tunes.com/player).
An account information confirmation screen
appears.
Tip
If you want to use multiple user accounts, see Using
Multiple Accounts ( page 1). Login can be made
from the Users screen.

4 Use q/w to select the menu, then press


ENTER.
Music:
The place to find your Artists, Albums, and
Playlists.
Shuffle:
Starts playing a random selection of tracks from
your Locker.
Search:
Find a specific Album, Artist, or Song.
Account Info:
Your MP3tunes account information.
Sign Out:
Log out of your MP3tunes account.

En-7
Utilisation dune webradio

Utilisation dune Utilisation de plusieurs comptes


Lampli-tuner AV prend en charge plusieurs comptes
Pandora internet Radio
Pour commencer
webradio utilisateur, ce qui signifie que vous pouvez librement (tats-Unis uniquement).......................... 2
commuter entre plusieurs connexions. Aprs avoir
enregistr des comptes utilisateur, lidentification est
Procdures courantes dans le menu de ralise partir de lcran Users . Utilisation de Rhapsody
webradio (Etats-Unis uniquement).......................... 3

Remarque
1 Appuyez sur MENU lorsque lcran Users est
affich.
Utilisation de SiriusXM Internet Radio
Les services disponibles peuvent varier en fonction de la Les lments de menu suivants saffichent :
(Amrique du Nord uniquement) ............ 4
rgion. Add new user :
Certain services rseau ou contenus disponible via cet Remove this user :
appareil peuvent tre inaccessibles au cas o le prestataire Vous pouvez soit stocker un nouveau compte
de services terminerait son service. Utilisation de la webradio Last.fm................ 5
utilisateur, soit en supprimer un existant.

1 Appuyez sur NET.


Conseil
Une liste des services rseau saffiche, et le
tmoin NET sallume. Sil clignote, vrifiez que le Certains des services ne permettent pas lutilisation de Utilisation de Slacker Personal Radio ......... 6
cble Ethernet est fermement branch sur plusieurs comptes utilisateur.
lampli-tuner AV. Vous pouvez stocker jusqu 10 comptes utilisateur.
Pour commuter entre les comptes, vous devez dabord
2 Slectionnez le service dsir et appuyez sur
ENTER.
vous dconnecter du compte actuel, puis vous reconnectez
depuis lcran Users .
La page principale du service slectionn
saffiche.

Fr-1
Utilisation dune webradio

Pandora internet Radio 2 Pour lire une station, utilisez q/w pour Delete this station :
Pour commencer (tats-Unis slectionner la station dans votre liste de Ceci supprimera de faon permanente la station
stations, puis appuyez sur ENTER. de votre compte Pandora. Au cas o vous
uniquement) La lecture dbute et lcran de lecture saffiche. dcideriez de rcrer la station avec les mmes
Pandora est un service de radio en ligne libre et Create a New Station : pistes ou les mmes artistes, tous vos
personnalis vous permettant de lire la musique que Saisissez le nom dune piste, dun artiste ou dun acceptations/rejets prcdents seront perdus.
vous connaissez et de dcouvrir celle que vous genre et Pandora crera une station radio unique Create station from this track :
aimez. pour vous en fonction des qualits musicales de Permet de crer une station radio partir de
la piste, de lartiste ou du genre choisi. cette piste.
Rename this station :
1 Utilisez q/w pour slectionner I have a Elments du menu
Vous permet de renommer la station radio
Pandora Account ou Im new to Pandora ,
I like this track : actuelle.
puis appuyez sur ENTER.
Acceptez la piste et Pandora lira dautres Bookmark this artist :
Si vous ne connaissez pas Pandora slectionnez
musiques similaires.
Im new to Pandora . Un code dactivation Pandora marquera votre artiste prfr pour
apparatra sur lcran de votre tlviseur. Notez I dont like this track : votre profil sur www.pandora.com.
ce code. Utilisez un ordinateur branch sur Rejetez la piste et Pandora liminera cette piste Bookmark this track :
Internet et connectez le navigateur de la station coute.
Pandora marquera la piste en cours et vous
www.pandora.com/onkyo Why is this track playing? : permettra de toutes les acheter sur Amazon ou
Saisissez votre code dactivation puis suivez les Dcouvrez certains des attributs musicaux que iTunes en une tape !
instructions pour crer votre compte Pandora et Pandora utilise pour crer vos stations radio Add to My Favorites :
vos stations webradio Pandora personnalises. personnelles.
Permet dajouter une station la liste My
Lorsque vous y tes invits, vous pouvez crer Im tired of this track : Favorites.
vos stations en saisissant vos pistes et vos Si vous en avez assez dune piste, vous pouvez
artistes prfrs. Aprs la cration de votre mettre la piste au repos et Pandora ne la lira
compte et de vos stations, vous pouvez retourner plus pendant un mois.
votre rcepteur Onkyo et appuyez sur entre Create station from this artist : PANDORA, le logo PANDORA, et lhabillage
pour couter votre webradio Pandora Permet de crer une station radio partir de cet commercial Pandora sont des marques
personnalise. artiste. commerciales ou des marques dposes de la
Si vous disposez dun compte Pandora, vous socit Pandora Media, Inc. Utilises avec
pouvez ajouter votre compte Pandora votre autorisation.
rcepteur Onkyo en slectionnant I have a
Pandora Account et y accder en entrant
votre adresse e-mail et votre mot de passe.
Conseil
Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes
utilisateur, consultez Utilisation de plusieurs
comptes ( page 1). Lidentification peut tre
ralise partir de lcran Users .

Fr-2
Utilisation dune webradio

Utilisation de Rhapsody (Etats-Unis 2 Utilisez q/w pour slectionner le menu, puis 3 Utilisez q/w pour slectionner un canal, puis
uniquement) appuyez sur ENTER. appuyez sur ENTER ou 1 pour dmarrer la
Search : lecture.
Vous pouvez rechercher des morceaux par La lecture dbute et lcran de lecture saffiche.
1 Utilisez q/w pour slectionner Sign in to your
artiste, par album ou par piste. Vous pouvez contrlez les pistes avec les
account , puis appuyez sur ENTER.
Vous devez possder un compte pour utiliser Music Guide : touches sur la tlcommande.
Rhapsody. Si vous ne disposez pas encore dun Vous pouvez lire des pistes partir des Boutons activs : 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7,
compte, vous pouvez en crer un partir de genres,des meilleurs artistes, des meilleurs 6, RANDOM, REPEAT
www.rhapsody.com/onkyo albums, des meilleures pistes, des nouveauts et
des slections du personnel. Remarque
Si vous possdez dj un compte Rhapsody,
slectionnez Sign in to your account , puis Rhapsody Channels : Sur les canaux Rhapsody, certaines touches ne
coutez les canaux de radio programme par les fonctionnent pas.
appuyez sur ENTER.
Saisissez votre nom utilisateur (en gnral votre meilleurs diteurs de Rhapsody. Elments du menu
adresse lectronique) et votre mot de passe dans Playlists : Add track to My Library :
lcran clavier suivant ou dans Configuration Permet de jouer vos listes de lecture Marquez les pistes en cours de lecture.
Web. personnelles. Add album to My Library :
My Library :
Utilisation de lcran clavier Marquez les albums en cours de lecture.
Marquez vos albums et vos pistes personnelles Add playlist to My Library :
1. Utilisez q/w/e/r et ENTER pour saisir votre dans le catalogue de Rhapsody laide de My
nom dutilisateur et votre mot de passe. Marquez les listes de lecture en cours de lecture.
Library.
2. Slectionnez OK . Add channel to My Channels :
Account Info :
3. Appuyez sur ENTER. Lcran Confirm Marquez les canaux de radio Rhapsody en cours
Vrifiez les informations de votre compte. de lecture.
your entries saffiche.
Sign Out : Add to My Favorites :
4. Appuyez sur ENTER.
Dconnectez-vous de votre compte Rhapsody. Permet dajouter une piste, un canal ou une liste
Conseil
de lecture la liste My Favorites.
Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes
utilisateur, consultez Utilisation de plusieurs Conseil
comptes ( page 1). Lidentification peut tre Vous pouvez supprimer des pistes, des albums et des
ralise partir de lcran Users . canaux Rhapsody marqus de My Library.

Fr-3
Utilisation dune webradio

Utilisation de SiriusXM Internet Radio 1 Utilisez q/w pour slectionner Sign In , puis 3 Utilisez q/w pour slectionner le canal de
(Amrique du Nord uniquement) appuyez sur ENTER. votre choix, puis appuyez sur ENTER.
Si vous possdez dj un compte SIRIUS, vous Lcran de lecture du canal slectionn saffiche
Votre ampli-tuner AV Onkyo comprend un essai pouvez y accder en slectionnant Sign In . et vous pouvez couter SiriusXM Internet Radio.
gratuit de SiriusXM Internet Radio. Lcran Account Saisissez votre nom utilisateur et votre mot de Vous pouvez contrlez les pistes avec les
Info affiche le nombre de jours restants dans votre passe dans lcran clavier suivant ou dans touches sur la tlcommande.
essai. Une fois la priode dessai expire, si vous Configuration Web. Si vous ne connaissez pas Boutons activs : 2, 3, 7, 6
souhaitez continuer couter le service, vous devez votre nom dutilisateur ou votre mot de passe,
vous abonner. Pour vous inscrire, accdez appelez Sirius XM au (888) 539-7474 pour Elments du menu
ladresse obtenir une assistance. Add to My Favorites :
www.siriusxm.com/internetradio laide de votre Conseil Permet dajouter un canal la liste My Favorites.
ordinateur.
Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes
utilisateur, consultez Utilisation de plusieurs
Lorsque vous vous inscrivez, vous devez fournir un comptes ( page 1). Lidentification peut tre
nom est un mot de passe utilisateur qui doivent tre ralise partir de lcran Users .
saisis dans lampli-tuner AV. Les abonnements SiriusXM Internet Radio sont
Utilisation de lcran clavier vendus sparment et sont subordonns par les
1. Utilisez q/w/e/r et ENTER pour saisir votre conditions Sirius (voir www.sirius.com). Assurez-vous
Pour utiliser SiriusXM Internet Radio, lampli-tuner AV
nom dutilisateur et votre mot de passe. de lire cet accord avant dacqurir votre abonnement.
doit tre connect Internet. Suivez les tapes ci-
2. Slectionnez OK . Sirius, XM et tous les logos et marques affrents sont
dessous laide de la tlcommande :
des marques dposes de Sirius XM Radio Inc. et de
3. Appuyez sur ENTER. Lcran Confirm
ses filiales. Tous droits rservs.
your entries saffiche.
4. Appuyez sur ENTER.
Please wait... saffiche, puis lcran
SiriusXM Internet Radio affiche la catgorie
que vous pouvez slectionner.

2 Utilisez q/w pour slectionner la catgorie,


puis appuyez sur ENTER.
Lcran de la liste des canaux de la catgorie
slectionne saffiche.

Fr-4
Utilisation dune webradio

Utilisation de la webradio Last.fm 1 Utilisez q/w pour slectionner Sign in to Profile :


your account , puis appuyez sur ENTER. Vous pouvez lire des pistes de Recently
Last.fm un service de musique qui apprend ce que Vous possdez dj un compte Last.fm, vous Listened Tracks , Library et
vous aimez pouvez vous y connecter pour slectionner Neighbours .
Votre nouvel ampli-tuner AV Onkyo est trs intelligent. Sign in to your account . Saisissez votre Account Info :
Si vous avez un compte Last.fm gratuit, il garde une nom utilisateur et votre mot de passe dans Vrifiez les informations de votre compte.
trace de toutes les chansons que vous avez juste lcran clavier suivant. Sign Out :
joues. Quand vous vous rendez sur le site Web de Pour vous dconnecter de votre compte.
Last.fm, vous pouvez voir les graphiques personnels Utilisation de lcran clavier
de la musique que vous avez apprcie, les partagez 1. Utilisez q/w/e/r et le bouton ENTER pour 3 Utilisez q/w pour slectionner une station, puis
avec vos amis et galement voir ce quils aiment. saisir votre nom dutilisateur et votre mot de appuyez sur ENTER ou 1 pour dmarrer la
passe. lecture.
Avec des milliers de biographies, de revues et un 2. Slectionnez OK . La lecture dbute et lcran de lecture saffiche.
choix infini de stations de radio personnalises et 3. Appuyez sur ENTER. Lcran Confirm
Elments du menu
sans pub, Last.fm est excellent moyen de dcouvrir your entries saffiche.
de la musique. Crez aujourdhui votre compte 4. Appuyez sur ENTER. I Love this track :
Last.fm gratuit sur www.last.fm/join Linformation de la piste est sauvegarde dans le
Please wait... apparait puis lcran Last.fm
serveur Last.fm, et la frquence de lecture
Internet Radio apparait.
augmente.
Inscrivez-vous et vous pourrez apprcier le meilleur
Conseil Ban this track :
de la radio sans pub Last.fm sur votre ampli-tuner AV
Onkyo sans ordinateur ! Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes Linformation de la piste est sauvegarde dans le
utilisateur, consultez Utilisation de plusieurs serveur Last.fm, et la frquence de lecture
Recommended Radio : comptes ( page 1). Lidentification peut tre diminue.
Dcouvrez les recommandations personnalises ralise partir de lcran Users .
futes qui changent en mme temps que vos gots. Add to My Favorites :
Artist Radio : 2 Utilisez q/w pour slectionner un menu puis Permet dajouter une station la liste My
appuyez sur ENTER. Favorites.
Slectionnez nimporte quel artiste et nous vous
jouerons une station entire de musique inspire par Search Station :
votre choix. Vous pouvez rechercher une station par artiste, Utilisation du contrle Scrobbling
My Library : par tag ou par nom dutilisateur. Utilisez q/w pour slectionner Enable , puis
Reposez-vous de retour et apprciez les slections Top Artists Station : appuyez sur ENTER.
partir de toute la musique que vous avez entendue Vous pouvez lire des pistes des artistes les mieux * Les services de webradio fournis par un tiers peuvent tre
depuis que vous avez joint Last.fm. valus. rsilis avec ou sans pravis.
Tag Radio : Top Tags Station : Les services de webradio peuvent ne pas tre accessibles
Funk polonaise ? Death pop ? Pensez un style et Vous pouvez lire des pistes des tags les mieux dans certaines zones.
nous vous divertirons avec pendant des heures. valus.
Personal Station :
Commencez votre essai gratuit immdiatement la Vous pouvez lire des pistes de votre station
cration votre compte et dcouvrez par vous-mme personnalise ( Your Library , Your
ce que cela fait davoir la musique du monde au bouts Neighbourhood et Your
des doigts. Les derniers prix et les informations Recommendations ).
compltes sont disponibles sur www.last.fm/subscribe

Fr-5
Utilisation dune webradio

Utilisation de Slacker Personal Radio 6 Vous pouvez contrlez les pistes avec les
touches sur la tlcommande.
1 Si vous ne possdez pas de compte, crez-en
un partir du site Web de Slacker
Boutons activs : 1, 3, 2, 6

(www.slacker.com) laide de votre Elments du menu


ordinateur. Rate Song as Favorite :
Permet de stocker des informations sur le
Si vous possdez dj un compte Slacker,
serveur, et daugmenter la probabilit que le
slectionnez Sign in to your account , puis
morceau soit lu de nouveau.
appuyez sur ENTER.
Ban Song :
Lcran clavier saffiche. Pouvez saisir des
Permet de stocker des informations sur le
informations partir de la tlcommande ou des
serveur, et de diminuer la probabilit que le
touches sur lappareil principal.
morceau soit lu de nouveau.
2 Si les informations que vous avez saisies ne Ban Artist :
comportent pas derreur, utilisezq/w/e/r Permet de stocker des informations sur le
pour slectionner OK , puis appuyez sur serveur, et de diminuer la probabilit que les
ENTER. morceaux de cet artiste soient lus de nouveau.
Lcran de confirmation des informations du Mark Favorite :
compte saffiche. Permet dajouter la station en cours de lecture
vos favoris.
3 Si vous ne possdez pas de compte,
slectionnez Access without Sign In , puis Unmark Favorite :
appuyez sur ENTER pour utiliser une version Permet de supprimer la station en cours de
restreinte du service. lecture de vos favoris.
Veuillez noter que lutilisation est restreinte. Add song to Library :
Conseil Permet dajouter la piste en cours de lecture
votre bibliothque.
Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes
utilisateur, consultez Utilisation de plusieurs Delete song from Library :
comptes ( page 1). Lidentification peut tre Permet de supprimer la piste en cours de lecture
ralise partir de lcran Users . de votre bibliothque.
Add to My Favorites :
4 Utilisez q/w pour slectionner un lment du
Permet dajouter une station ou un morceau la
menu, puis appuyez sur ENTER.
liste My Favorites.
Pour vous dconnecter, utilisez q/w pour
slectionner Sign out depuis cet cran, puis
appuyez sur ENTER.

5 Utilisez q/w pour slectionner une station,


puis appuyez sur ENTER ou 1 pour dmarrer
la lecture depuis cette station.
Lcran de lecture apparat.

Fr-6
Uso de Internet Radio

Uso de Internet Radio Uso de mltiples cuentas


El receptor de AV permite mltiples cuentas de
Pandora Internet Radio
usuario, lo que quiere decir que se puede cambiar Primeros pasos (solo EE.UU.)............... 2
Procedimientos comunes en el men libremente entre varios usuarios. Despus de
Internet Radio registrar las cuentas de usuario, el acceso se realiza
desde la pantalla Users. Uso de Rhapsody (slo EE.UU.)................... 3
Nota
Los servicios disponibles pueden variar de una regin a 1 Pulse MENU cuando aparezca la pantalla de
usuarios.
otra. Uso de SiriusXM Internet Radio
Es posible que determinados servicios de red o contenidos Aparecern los siguientes elementos del men:
(solo Norteamrica).................................. 4
disponibles a travs de este dispositivo no sean accesibles Add new user:
si el proveedor del servicio da por finalizado el servicio. Remove this user:
Puede guardar una nueva cuenta de usuario o
Uso de Last.fm Internet Radio ...................... 5
1 Pulse NET. borrar una existente.
Aparecer una lista de los servicios de red y se
iluminar el indicador NET. Si parpadea, Consejo
verifique que el cable Ethernet est firmemente
Algunos de los servicios no permiten el uso de mltiples Uso de Slacker Personal Radio .................... 6
conectado al receptor de AV.
cuentas de usuario.
2 Seleccione el servicio deseado y pulse
ENTER.
Puede guardar hasta 10 cuentas de usuario.
Para cambiar entre cuentas debe antes cerrar sesin en la
Aparecer la pgina principal del servicio cuenta actual y acceder de nuevo en la pantalla Users.
seleccionado.

Es-1
Uso de Internet Radio

Pandora Internet Radio 2 Utilice q/w para seleccionar la emisora en la Delete this station:
Primeros pasos (solo EE.UU.) lista de emisoras y luego pulse ENTER. Esto eliminar de forma permanente una
Se inicia la reproduccin y aparece la pantalla de emisora de su cuenta de Pandora. Toda la
Pandora es un servicio de radio por Internet gratuito y reproduccin. informacin sobre sus aprobaciones/
personalizado que reproduce la msica que usted Create a New Station: desaprobaciones se perder si quiere volver a
conoce y le ayudar a descubrir msica que le Introduzca el nombre de un tema, artista o crear la emisora con el mismo tema o artista.
encantar. gnero; Pandora crear una emisora de radio Create station from this track:
exclusiva para usted basada en las cualidades Crea una emisora de radio a partir de este tema.
1 Utilice q/w para seleccionar I have a Pandora musicales de ese tema, de ese artista o de ese Rename this station:
Account o Im new to Pandora y luego gnero. Le permite renombrar la emisora de radio actual.
pulse ENTER. Bookmark this artist:
Elementos del men
Si no conoce Pandora seleccione Im new to Pandora marcar su artista favorito para su perfil
Pandora. Ver un cdigo de activacin en la I like this track:
en www.pandora.com.
pantalla del televisor. Tome nota de este cdigo. Si aprueba (pulgar arriba) un tema, Pandora
Bookmark this track:
Vaya a un ordenador conectado a Internet y dirija reproducir ms msica parecida.
Pandora marcar el tema actual y le permitir
el navegador a www.pandora.com/onkyo I dont like this track:
comprarlos todos en Amazon o iTunes con un
Introduzca su cdigo de activacin y siga las Si no aprueba (pulgar abajo) el tema, Pandora
solo paso!
instrucciones para crear su cuenta de Pandora y eliminar dicho tema de la emisora actual.
Add to My Favorites:
sus emisoras de radio por Internet Why is this track playing?:
Aade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos.
personalizadas de Pandora. Puede crear sus Descubra algunos de los atributos musicales que
propias emisoras introduciendo sus temas y Pandora utiliza para crear sus emisoras de radio
artistas favoritos cuando aparezca la solicitud personalizadas.
correspondiente. Una vez creada su cuenta y sus Im tired of this track: PANDORA, el logotipo de PANDORA logo, y la
emisoras, puede regresar al receptor Onkyo y Si se cansa de un tema, puede silenciarlo de imagen corporativa de Pandora son marcas
pulsar Enter para empezar a escuchar su radio modo que Pandora no lo reproduzca durante un comerciales o marcas comerciales registradas de
por Internet personalizada de Pandora. mes. Pandora Media, Inc. Uso con permiso.
Si ya dispone de una cuenta de Pandora, puede Create station from this artist:
aadirla al receptor Onkyo seleccionando I have Crea una emisora de radio a partir de este
a Pandora Account e iniciando la sesin con su artista.
direccin de correo electrnico y contrasea.
Consejo
Si desea utilizar mltiples cuentas de usuario,
consulte Uso de mltiples cuentas ( pgina 1). Se
puede iniciar sesin desde la pantalla Users.

Es-2
Uso de Internet Radio

Uso de Rhapsody (slo EE.UU.) 2 Utilice q/w para seleccionar el men y luego 3 Utilice q/w para seleccionar una emisora y
pulse ENTER. luego pulse ENTER o 1 para iniciar la
1 Utilice q/w para seleccionar Sign in to your Search: reproduccin.
account y luego pulse ENTER. Puede buscar msica por artista, lbum o Se inicia la reproduccin y aparece la pantalla de
Para utilizar Rhapsody, necesitar una cuenta. Si cancin. reproduccin.
todava no tiene una, puede crear una nueva en Music Guide: Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del
www.rhapsody.com/onkyo Puede reproducir canciones por gneros, artistas mando a distancia.
Si ya tiene una cuenta Rhapsody, seleccione principales, lbumes principales o canciones Botones activados: 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7,
Sign in to your account y pulse ENTER. principales, novedades, seleccin del sitio. 6, RANDOM, REPEAT
Escriba su nombre de usuario (normalmente el Rhapsody Channels:
Nota
correo electrnico) y contrasea en la pantalla de Escuche las emisoras de radio programadas por
teclado que aparece a continuacin o en la los principales redactores de Rhapsody. En Rhapsody Channels, algunos de los botones no
configuracin web. funcionan.
Playlists:
Utilizacin de la pantalla de teclado Reproduzca sus listas personales. Elementos del men
My Library: Add track to My Library:
1. Utilice q/w/e/r y ENTER para introducir su
nombre de usuario y su contrasea. Marque sus lbumes y canciones preferidas en Marca las canciones que se estn reproduciendo
el catlogo de Rhapsody, usando Mi biblioteca. actualmente.
2. Seleccione OK.
3. Pulse ENTER. Aparecer la pantalla Account Info: Add album to My Library:
Confirm your entries. Confirme los datos de su cuenta. Marca los lbumes que se estn reproduciendo
4. Pulse ENTER. Sign Out: actualmente.
Salga de su cuenta Rhapsody. Add playlist to My Library:
Consejo
Marca las listas de reproduccin que se estn
Si desea utilizar mltiples cuentas de usuario, reproduciendo actualmente.
consulte Uso de mltiples cuentas ( pgina 1). Se
Add channel to My Channels:
puede iniciar sesin desde la pantalla Users.
Marca las emisoras de Rhapsody que se estn
reproduciendo actualmente.
Add to My Favorites:
Aade una cancin, emisora o lista de
reproduccin a la lista Mis favoritos.
Consejo
Puede eliminar las canciones, los lbumes y las
emisoras de Rhapsody marcados de Mi biblioteca.

Es-3
Uso de Internet Radio

Uso de SiriusXM Internet Radio (solo 1 Utilice q/w para seleccionar Sign In, y luego 3 Utilice q/w para seleccionar la emisora
Norteamrica) pulse ENTER. deseada y luego pulse ENTER.
Si ya tiene una cuenta SIRIUS, puede acceder Aparecer la pantalla de reproduccin de la
Su receptor de AV Onkyo incluye una prueba gratuita seleccionando Sign In. Escriba su nombre de emisora seleccionada y ahora usted podr
de SiriusXM Internet Radio. La pantalla Account usuario y contrasea en la pantalla de teclado escuchar SiriusXM Internet Radio.
Info muestra los das que quedan de la prueba. Una que aparece a continuacin o en la configuracin Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del
vez que termine el periodo de prueba, si desea seguir web. Si no sabe su nombre de usuario o la mando a distancia.
escuchando este servicio, deber contratarlo. para contrasea, llame a Sirius XM al nmero (888) Botones activados: 2, 3, 7, 6
suscribirse vaya a 539-7474 para solicitar asistencia.
www.siriusxm.com/internetradio con su Elementos del men
Consejo
ordenador. Add to My Favorites:
Si desea utilizar mltiples cuentas de usuario,
consulte Uso de mltiples cuentas ( pgina 1). Se Aade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos.
Cuando se suscriba, recibir un nombre de usuario y puede iniciar sesin desde la pantalla Users.
una contrasea que deber introducir en el receptor
de AV. Utilizacin de la pantalla de teclado
1. Utilice q/w/e/r y ENTER para introducir su
nombre de usuario y su contrasea. Las suscripciones a SiriusXM Internet Radio se
Para poder utilizar SiriusXM Internet Radio, el
2. Seleccione OK. venden por separado y se rigen por las condiciones
receptor de AV debe estar conectado a internet. Para
3. Pulse ENTER. Aparecer la pantalla de Sirius (consulte www.sirius.com). Lea
usar el mando a distancia, siga este procedimiento:
atentamente este acuerdo antes de comprar la
Confirm your entries.
suscripcin. Sirius, XM y todas las marcas y logotipos
4. Pulse ENTER.
relacionados son marcas comerciales de Sirius XM
Aparecer Please wait... y despus la pantalla Radio Inc. y sus filiales. Todos los derechos
SiriusXM Internet Radio, que muestra la reservados.
categora disponible para la seleccin.

2 Utilice q/w para seleccionar la categora y


luego pulse ENTER.
Aparece una pantalla con una lista de emisoras
de la categora seleccionada.

Es-4
Uso de Internet Radio

Uso de Last.fm Internet Radio 1 Utilice q/w para seleccionar Sign in to your Profile:
account, y luego pulse ENTER. Puede reproducir pistas de Recently Listened
Last.fm es un servicio musical que sabe lo que le Si ya tiene una cuenta de Last.fm, puede Tracks, Library y Neighbours.
gusta... acceder a ella para seleccionar Sign in to your Account Info:
Su nuevo receptor de AV Onkyo es muy inteligente. account. Introduzca su nombre de usuario y Confirme los datos de su cuenta.
Si tiene una cuenta gratuita de Last.fm, har un contrasea en la siguiente pantalla de teclado. Sign Out:
seguimiento de todas las canciones que acaba de Se desconecta de su cuenta.
escuchar. Cuando visite el sitio web de Last.fm, Utilizacin de la pantalla de teclado
podr ver listas personales de la msica que ha 1. Utilice q/w/e/r y ENTER para introducir su 3 Utilice q/w para seleccionar una emisora y
disfrutado, compartirlas con sus amigos y tambin nombre de usuario y su contrasea. luego pulse ENTER o 1 para iniciar la
ver lo que les gusta a ellos. 2. Seleccione OK. reproduccin.
3. Pulse ENTER. Aparecer la pantalla Se inicia la reproduccin y aparece la pantalla de
Con sus miles de biografas, crticas y una infinita Confirm your entries. reproduccin.
variedad de emisoras de radio personalizadas y sin 4. Pulse ENTER.
Elementos del men
publicidad, Last.fm es una forma excelente de Aparecer Please wait... y despus la pantalla
descubrir msica. Cree hoy mismo una cuenta I Love this track:
Last.fm Internet Radio.
gratuita de Last.fm en www.last.fm/join Se guarda la informacin sobre la cancin en el
Consejo servidor de Last.fm y aumenta la frecuencia con
Si desea utilizar mltiples cuentas de usuario, la que se reproduce.
Si se suscribe podr disfrutar de lo mejor de Last.fm
consulte Uso de mltiples cuentas ( pgina 1). Se Ban this track:
Radio sin anuncios en su receptor de AV Onkyo sin puede iniciar sesin desde la pantalla Users.
necesidad de un ordenador. Se guarda la informacin sobre la cancin en el
servidor de Last.fm y se reduce la frecuencia con
Recommended Radio: 2 Utilice q/w para seleccionar un men y luego
la que se reproduce.
Descubra nuestras interesantes recomendaciones pulse ENTER.
personalizadas que se adaptan a sus gustos en cada Search Station: Add to My Favorites:
momento. Puede buscar emisoras por artista, etiquetas o Aade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos.
Artist Radio: nombre de usuario.
Escoja cualquier artista y podr escuchar una Top Artists Station: Uso del control de scrobbling
emisora de radio inspirada exclusivamente en su Puede reproducir canciones de los artistas mejor Utilice q/w para seleccionar Enable, y luego pulse
eleccin. clasificados. ENTER.
My Library: Top Tags Station: * Los servicios de radio por Internet suministrados por
Reljese y disfrute de selecciones de toda la msica Puede reproducir canciones con las etiquetas terceros pueden cancelarse con o sin aviso previo.
que ha escuchado desde que se registr en Last.fm. mejor clasificadas. Es posible que los servicios de radio por Internet no estn
Tag Radio: Personal Station: disponibles en algunas zonas.
Polish funk? Death pop? Piense en un estilo y Puede reproducir pistas de una emisora
podr escucharlo durante horas. personalizada (Your Library, Your
Neighbourhood y Your Recommendations).
Prubelo gratis ahora mismo. Cree una cuenta y ver
por s mismo lo que significa tener toda la msica del
mundo al alcance de sus odos. Puede consultar los
precios actualizados y toda la informacin que desee
en www.last.fm/subscribe

Es-5
Uso de Internet Radio

Uso de Slacker Personal Radio 6 Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del
mando a distancia.
1 Si no tiene una cuenta, cree una en el sitio web
de Slacker (www.slacker.com) con su
Botones activados: 1, 3, 2, 6

ordenador. Elementos del men


Rate Song as Favorite:
Si ya tiene una cuenta de Slacker, seleccione
Guarda informacin en el servidor, haciendo que
Sign in to your account y pulse ENTER.
sea ms probable que la cancin se vuelva a
Aparecer la pantalla de teclado. Puede reproducir.
introducir informacin desde el mando a
Ban Song:
distancia o desde el teclado de la unidad
Guarda informacin en el servidor, haciendo que
principal.
sea menos probable que la cancin se vuelva a
2 Si no hay errores en la informacin que ha reproducir.
introducido, utilice q/w/e/r para seleccionar Ban Artist:
OK y luego pulse ENTER. Guarda informacin en el servidor, haciendo que
Aparecer una pantalla de confirmacin de la sea menos probable que las canciones de este
informacin de la cuenta. artista se vuelvan a reproducir.
Mark Favorite:
3 Si no tiene una cuenta, seleccione Access
without Sign In y pulse ENTER para utilizar Aade la emisora que se est reproduciendo
una versin restringida del servicio. actualmente a los favoritos.
Tenga en cuenta que el uso estar restringido. Unmark Favorite:
Elimina la emisora que se est reproduciendo
Consejo
actualmente de los favoritos.
Si desea utilizar mltiples cuentas de usuario,
Add song to Library:
consulte Uso de mltiples cuentas ( pgina 1). Se
puede iniciar sesin desde la pantalla Users. Aade la cancin que se est reproduciendo
actualmente a su biblioteca.
4 Utilice q/w para seleccionar un men y luego Delete song from Library:
pulse ENTER. Elimina la cancin que se est reproduciendo
Para salir, utilice q/w para seleccionar Sign out actualmente de la biblioteca.
en esta pantalla y luego pulse ENTER. Add to My Favorites:
Aade una emisora o cancin a la lista Mis
5 Utilice q/w para seleccionar una emisora y
favoritos.
luego pulse ENTER o 1 para iniciar la
reproduccin de la emisora.
Aparecer la pantalla de reproduccin.

Es-6
Y1212-1

SN 29401478IRUS
* 2 9 4 0 1 4 7 8 I R U S *
Using Internet Radio

Using Internet Radio Using Multiple Accounts


The AV receiver supports multiple user accounts, Using Last.fm Internet Radio ........................ 2
which means you can freely switch between several
Common Procedures in Internet Radio logins. After registering user accounts, login is
Menu performed from the Users screen.

Note
1 Press MENU while the Users screen is
displayed.
Available services may vary depending on the region.
Certain network service or contents available through this The following menu items appear:
device may not be accessible in case the service provider Add new user:
terminates its service.
Remove this user:
You can either store a new user account, or
1 Press NET. delete an existing one.
A list of the network services appears, and the
NET indicator lights. If it flashes, verify that the
Tip
Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV
receiver. Some of the services dont allow the use of multiple user
accounts.
2 Select the desired service and press ENTER. You can store up to 10 user accounts.
The top page of the selected service appears. To switch between accounts you must first log out from the
current account, and log in again on the Users screen.

En-1
Using Internet Radio

Using Last.fm Internet Radio 1 Use q/w to select Sign in to your account, Profile:
and then press ENTER. You can play tracks from Recently Listened
Last.fm is a music service that learns what you If you have the existing Last.fm account, you can Tracks, Library and Neighbours.
love... sign in to your account to select Sign in to your Account Info:
Your new Onkyo AV receiver is very clever. If you account. Enter your user name and password in Confirm your account information.
have a free Last.fm account, it will keep track of all the next keyboard screen. Sign Out:
the songs youve just played. When you visit the
Using the keyboard screen It signs out from your account.
Last.fm website, you can see personal charts of the
music youve enjoyed, share them with friends and 1. Use q/w/e/r and the ENTER to enter your 3 Use q/w to select a station, and press ENTER
see what they like, too. user name and password. or 1 to start playback.
2. Select OK. Playback starts and the playback screen
With thousands of biographies, reviews and an 3. Press ENTER. The Confirm your entries appears.
endless choice of personalised, ad-free radio screen appears. Enabled buttons: 1, 2, 6
stations, Last.fm is a great way to discover music. 4. Press ENTER.
Pick up your free Last.fm account today at Menu Items
Please wait... appears and then Last.fm
www.last.fm/join Internet Radio screen appears. I Love this track:
Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and
Tip playback frequency increases.
UK and Germany only:
If you want to use multiple user accounts, see Using Ban this track:
Get a subscription and you can enjoy the best of ad- Multiple Accounts ( page 1). Login can be made
free Last.fm Radio on your Onkyo AV receiver without Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and
from the Users screen.
a computer! playback frequency reduces.
Recommended Radio: 2 Use q/w to select menu and then press Add to My Favorites:
ENTER. Adds a station to My Favorites list.
Discover smart personalised recommendations that
adapt as your tastes change. Search Station:
Artist Radio: You can search station by Artist, Tag, or User Using scrobbling control
Name. Use q/w to select Enable, and then press ENTER.
Pick any artist and well play you a whole station of
music inspired by your choice. Top Artists Station:
* Internet radio services provided by a third party may be
My Library: You can play tracks of top-rated artists.
terminated with or without notice.
Sit back and enjoy selections from all the music Top Tags Station: Internet radio services may not be available in some areas.
youve heard since you joined Last.fm. You can play tracks of top-rated tags.
Tag Radio: Personal Station:
Polish funk? Death pop? Think of a style and well You can play tracks from personalized station
entertain you with it for hours. (Your Library, Your Neighbourhood and
Your Recommendations).
Start your free trial straight away when you create
your account and see for yourself what its like to
have the worlds music at your fingertips. Latest
prices and full information are available at
www.last.fm/subscribe

En-2
Internetradio verwenden

Internetradio verwenden Verwendung mehrerer Konten


Der AV-Receiver untersttzt mehrere Nutzerkonten, Verwendung von Last.fm Internet Radio ..... 2
was bedeutet, dass Sie frei zwischen mehreren
Allgemeine Verfahren bei den Logins umschalten knnen. Nach der Anmeldung der
Internetradio-Mens Nutzerkonten wird das Login vom Users Bildschirm
aus vorgenommen.
Anmerkung
Die verfgbaren Dienste sind lnderabhngig verschieden. 1 Drcken Sie MENU whrend der Bildschirm
des Nutzers angezeigt wird.
Bestimmte Netzwerkdienste oder ber dieses Gert zur
Verfgung stehende Inhalte stehen eventuell nicht zur Das folgende Men erscheint:
Verfgung, falls der Service-Anbieter seine Dienstleistung Add new user:
beendet. Remove this user:
Sie knnen entweder ein neues Nutzerkonto
1 Drcken Sie NET. abspeichern oder ein bestehendes lschen.
Es erscheint eine Liste der Netzwerkdienste und
die NET-Anzeige leuchtet. Wenn sie blinkt,
Tipp
berprfen Sie ob das Ethernet-Kabel fest im AV-
Receiver eingesteckt ist. Einige dieser Dienstleistungen lassen keine mehrfachen
Nutzerkonten zu.
2 Whlen Sie den gewnschten Service aus und
drcken Sie ENTER.
Sie knnen bis zu 10 Nutzerkonten speichern.
Um zwischen den Konten umzuschalten, mssen Sie sich
Die oberste Seite des ausgewhlten Services zuerst aus Ihrem aktuellen Konto ausloggen und sich dann
erscheint. wieder auf dem Users Bildschirm einloggen.

De-1
Internetradio verwenden
knnen. Die aktuellen Nutzungspreise und umfassende Personal Station:
Verwendung von Last.fm Internet Radio Infos sind unter www.last.fm/subscribe erhltlich
Sie knnen Titel aus einem persnlich
Last.fm ist ein Musikdienst, der sich Ihre angepassten Sender wiedergeben (Your
Lieblingsmusik merkt... 1 Verwenden Sie q/w, um Sign in to your
account auszuwhlen und dann drcken Sie
Library, Your Neighbourhood und Your
Ihr neuer Onkyo AV-Receiver ist uerst clever. Wenn Sie Recommendations).
ENTER.
ein kostenloses Last.fm-Konto eingerichtet haben, werden Profile:
darin alle krzlich abgespielten Titel gespeichert. Wenn Sie Wenn Sie ber einen bestehenden Last.fm Konto
verfgen, knnen Sie sich anmelden und Sign Sie knnen Titel aus Recently Listened Tracks,
die Last.fm-Website besuchen, knnen Sie Ihre Library und Neighbours wiedergeben.
persnlichen Charts der von Ihnen abgespielten Musik in to your account whlen. Geben Sie Ihre Ihre
Benutzernamen und das Kennwort in der Account Info:
anzeigen; teilen Sie diese mit Freunden und sehen Sie Besttigen Sie Ihre Kontoinformation.
folgenden Tastaturanzeige ein.
auch, welche Musik Ihre Freunde mgen.
Sign Out:
Verwendung der Tastaturanzeige
Mit tausenden von Biografien, Rezensionen und einer Zur Abmeldung aus Ihrem Konto.
schier endlosen Auswahl an persnlich angepassten, 1. Verwenden Sie q/w/e/r und den ENTER, um
werbefreien Radiosendern ist Last.fm eine groartige Ihren Nutzernamen und Passwort einzugeben. 3 Verwenden Sie q/w, um einen Sender
auszuwhlen und dann drcken Sie ENTER
Gelegenheit, um Musik zu entdecken. Holen Sie sich 2. Whlen Sie OK.
Ihr kostenloses Last.fm-Konto noch heute unter 3. Drcken Sie ENTER. Die Anzeige Confirm oder 1 , um die Wiedergabe zu starten.
www.last.fm/join your entries erscheint. Die Wiedergabe wird gestartet und die
4. Drcken Sie ENTER. Wiedergabeanzeige erscheint.
Nur fr Grobritannien und Deutschland: Aktivierte Tasten: 1, 2, 6
Holen Sie sich ein Abonnement und Sie knnen auch Please wait... wird angezeigt und danach
ohne Computer die besten werbefreien Last.fm- erscheint die Last.fm Internet Radio-Anzeige. Mensymbole
Radiosender auf Ihrem Onkyo AV-Receiver hren! Tipp
I Love this track:
Recommended Radio: Titel-Informationen werden auf dem Last.fm-
Falls Sie mehrere Nutzerkonten verwenden mchten, Server gespeichert und die Hufigkeit der
Entdecken Sie smarte, persnlich angepasste schlagen Sie bitte unter Verwendung mehrerer
Empfehlungen, die sich mit Ihrem Musikgeschmack Konten nach ( Seite 1). Das Login kann vom
Wiedergabe wird erhht.
verndern. Users-Bildschirm aus erfolgen. Ban this track:
Artist Radio: Titel-Informationen werden auf dem Last.fm-
Whlen Sie einen beliebigen Interpreten und wir 2 Verwenden Sie q/w, um das Men
auszuwhlen und dann drcken Sie ENTER.
Server gespeichert und die Hufigkeit der
spielen fr Sie einen ganzen Radiosender mit durch Wiedergabe wird verringert.
Ihre Wahl inspirierter Musik. Search Station: Add to My Favorites:
My Library: Sie knnen einen Sender anhand Interpreten, Fgt einen Sender zu meiner My Favorites Liste hinzu.
Lehnen Sie sich zurck und erfreuen Sie sich an Tags oder Benutzernamen suchen.
einer Auswahl aller Musik, die Sie seit Ihrer Top Artists Station: Scrobbling-Steuerung verwenden
Mitgliedschaft bei Last.fm gehrt haben. Sie knnen Titel der am besten bewerteten
Verwenden Sie q/w, um Enable auszuwhlen und
Tag Radio: Interpreten wiedergeben.
dann drcken Sie ENTER.
Polish Funk? Death Pop? Denken Sie an einen Top Tags Station:
Musikstil und wir unterhalten Sie stundenlang damit. Sie knnen Titel der am besten bewerteten Tags * Von Drittparteien zur Verfgung gestellte Internetradio-
wiedergeben. Dienste knnen unter Umstnden ohne Vorankndigung
Starten Sie Ihr kostenloses Probeabo direkt wenn Sie eingestellt werden.
Ihr Konto erstellen und finden Sie selbst heraus wie es In bestimmten Gebieten sind Internetradio-Dienste
ist, jederzeit die Musik der ganzen Welt abrufen zu eventuell nicht verfgbar.

Y1212-1

SN 29401479IREU
* 2 9 4 0 1 4 7 9 I R E U *
Remote Control Codes

Remote Control Codes 1 While holding down the REMOTE MODE button to which you want to assign a
code, press and hold down [DISPLAY] (about 3 seconds).
The REMOTE MODE button/Remote indicator lights.
On Integra products, button names are capitalized. For example, Remote Mode
button and Display button.

/ Notes:
Remote control codes cannot be entered for [RECEIVER] and the multi zone button.
Only TV remote control codes can be entered for [TV].
Except for [RECEIVER], [TV], and the multi zone button, remote control codes from any
category can be assigned for the REMOTE MODE buttons. However, these buttons also work
as input selector buttons, so choose a REMOTE MODE button that corresponds with the input
to which you connect your component. For example, if you connect your CD player to the CD
input, choose [TV/CD] when entering its remote control code.

2 Within 30 seconds, use the number buttons to enter the 5-digit remote control
code.
The REMOTE MODE button/Remote indicator flashes twice.
If the remote control code is not entered successfully, the REMOTE MODE
button/Remote indicator will flash once slowly.
Notes:
The flashing element of the remote controller will differ according to your AV receivers model.
The remote controller is preconfigured with remote controller presets of different components.
By entering a code from the Remote Control Code list, you can activate the relevant preset for
that component.
When there are multiple codes related to one manufacturer, try and enter them one-by-one until
it matches your component.
Depending on the model and year of your component, compatibility is not guaranteed.
With some models, the remote controller may not not work or its compatibility may be limited
to part of the components functionality.
Besides, it is not possible to add new codes to the existing remote controller presets.
Though the provided remote control codes are correct at the time of printing, they are subject to
change by the manufacturer.

1
Remote Control Codes
Codes de tlcommande Cdigos de control remoto

1 Tout en maintenant enfonc le bouton REMOTE MODE auquel vous souhaitez


associer un code, pressez et maintenez enfonc le bouton [DISPLAY] (pendant
1 Manteniendo pulsado el botn REMOTE MODE para el cual desea introducir un
cdigo, pulse y mantenga presionado el botn [DISPLAY] (aproximadamente 3
environ 3 secondes). segundos).
Le bouton REMOTE MODE/le tmoin Remote sallume. Se iluminar el botn REMOTE MODE/indicador Remote.
Les noms de boutons sont en manjuscules sur les produits Integra. Par exemple, le En los productos Integra, los nombres de los botones aparecen con maysculas. Por
bouton Remote Mode et le bouton Display . ejemplo, el botn Remote Mode y el botn Display.
Remarques : Notas:
Les codes de tlcommande ne peuvent pas tre entrs pour [RECEIVER] et le bouton multi No podrn introducirse cdigos de mando a distancia para [RECEIVER] y el botn multizona.
zone. nicamente podrn introducirse cdigos de mando a distancia de televisor para el botn [TV].
Seul les code de tlcommande de tlviseurs peuvent tre entrs pour [TV]. Con la excepcin de [RECEIVER], [TV] y el botn multizona, se pueden asignar cdigos de
lexception de [RECEIVER], [TV] et du bouton multi zone, vous pouvez affecter des codes mando a distancia de cualquier categora a los botones de REMOTE MODE. No obstante, estos
de tlcommande de nimporte quelle catgorie pour les boutons REMOTE MODE. Cependant, botones tambin pueden funcionar como botones de selector de entrada; por tanto, seleccione
ces boutons font galement office de bouton de slecteur dentre : par consquent, choisissez un botn REMOTE MODE que se corresponda con la entrada a la cual est conectado el
un bouton REMOTE MODE correspondant lentre laquelle vous souhaitez raccorder votre componente. Por ejemplo, si conecta un reproductor de CD a la entrada de CD, seleccione
appareil. Par exemple, si vous raccordez votre lecteur CD lentre CD, choisissez [TV/CD] [TV/CD] cuando introduzca su cdigo de mando a distancia.
lorsque vous saisissez le code de tlcommande.
2 Antes de que transcurran 30 segundos, utilice los botones numricos para
2 Vous disposez de 30 secondes pour saisir le code de tlcommande cinq chiffres
laide des boutons numrots.
introducir el cdigo de mando a distancia de 5 dgitos.
El botn REMOTE MODE/indicador Remote parpadear dos veces.
Le bouton REMOTE MODE/le tmoin Remote clignote deux fois. Si el cdigo de mando a distancia no se introduce correctamente, el botn REMOTE
Si le code de tlcommande na pas t saisi correctement le bouton REMOTE MODE/indicador Remote parpadear una vez despacio.
MODE/lindicateur Remote ne clignote quune seule fois. Notas:
Remarques : El parpadeo del mando distancia ser distinto segn el modelo de receptor de AV.
Llment clignotant de la tlcommande diffrera selon le modle de votre ampli-tuner AV. El mando a distancia est preconfigurado con los ajustes predeterminados de los distintos
La tlcommande est prconfigure avec des prrglages de tlcommande de diffrents componentes. Al introducir un cdigo de la lista de cdigos del mando a distancia se puede
appareils. En entrant un code de la liste des codes de tlcommandes, vous pouvez activer le activar el ajuste predeterminado de ese componente.
prrglage appropri pour cet appreil. Cuando hay mltiples cdigos relacionados con un fabricante, pruebe a introducirlos uno a uno
Quand il y a de multiples codes lis un fabricant, essayez-les et entrez-les un par un jusqu ce hasta que coincida con su componente.
que cela corresponde votre appareil. Dependiendo del modelo y el ao de su componente, la compatibilidad no est garantizada.
Selon le modle et lanne de votre appareil, la compatibilit nest pas garantie. Con algunos modelos, es posible que el mando a distancia no funcione o que su compatibilidad
Avec certains modles, la tlcommande peut ne pas fonctionner ou sa compatibilit peut tre est limitada a una parte de las funciones del componente.
limite une partie de la fonctionnalit de lappareil. Adems, no es posible aadir nuevos cdigos a los ajustes predeterminados existentes del
En outre, il nest pas possible dajouter de nouveaux codes aux prrglages de tlcommande mando a distancia.
existants. Los cdigos de mando a distancia suministrados son correctos en el momento de la impresin,
Bien que les codes de tlcommande fournis soient corrects au moment de limpression de la pero el fabricante puede realizar cambios.
liste, ils sont susceptibles dtre modifis par le fabricant.

2
Remote Control Codes
Codici del telecomando Fernbedienungscodes

1 Tenendo premuto il tasto REMOTE MODE al quale si desidera assegnare il


codice, premere e tenere premuto [DISPLAY] (per circa 3 secondi).
1 Halten Sie die REMOTE MODE-Taste gedruckt, fur die Sie den Code eingeben
mochten, und drucken Sie (ca. 3 Sekunden lang) die [DISPLAY]-Taste.
Il tasto REMOTE MODE/l'indicatore Remote si accende. Die REMOTE MODE-Taste/Remote-Anzeige leuchtet.
Sui prodotti Integra, i nomi dei tasti sono scritti con l'iniziale maiuscola. Ad esempio, Bei den Integra-Produkten werden die Namen der Tasten gro geschrieben. Zum
tasto Remote Mode e tasto Display. Beispiel Remote Mode (Fernbedienungsmodus)-Taste und Display-Taste.
Note: Hinweise:
I codici di controllo del telecomando non possono essere inseriti per [RECEIVER] e i tasti multi Der Fernbedienungscode kann nicht [RECEIVER] und der Multi-Zonen-Taste zugeordnet
zona. werden.
Per [TV] possibile immettere solo codici telecomando del televisore. Der Taste [TV] knnen nur Fernbedienungscodes fr einen Fernseher zugeordnet werden.
Tranne che per [RECEIVER], [TV], e per il tasto multi zona, possibile assegnare codici di Abgesehen von [RECEIVER], [TV] und der Multi-Zone-Taste, knnen die
controllo di ogni categoria per i tasti REMOTE MODE. Tuttavia, tali tasti fungono anche da Fernbedienungscodes jeder Kategorie den REMOTE MODE-Tasten zugewiesen werden.
tasti del selettore d'ingresso, quindi scegliere un tasto REMOTE MODE che corrisponda Allerdings dienen diese Tasten auch als Quellenwahltasten. Whlen Sie also nach Mglichkeit
all'ingresso al quale viene collegato il dispositivo. Per esempio, se si collega il lettore CD eine REMOTE MODE-Taste, die dem Eingang zugeordnet ist, an den Sie die betreffende Quelle
all'ingresso CD, scegliere il [TV/CD] quando si immette il relativo codice telecomando. angeschlossen haben. Wenn Sie z.B. einen CD-Player an den CD-Eingang anschlieen, sollten
Sie [TV/CD] wenn Sie den Fernbedienungscode eingeben.
2 Entro 30 secondi utilizzare i tasti numerici per inserire il codice telecomando a 5
cifre. 2 Geben Sie mit den Zifferntasten innerhalb von 30 Sekunden den 5-stelligen
Herstellercode ein.
Il tasto REMOTE MODE/l'indicatore Remote lampeggia due volte.
Se il codice telecomando non viene inserito correttamente, il tasto REMOTE Die REMOTE MODE-Taste/Remote-Anzeige blinkt zwei Mal.
MODE/l'indicatore Remote lampeggia lentamente una volta. Wenn der Fernbedienungscode nicht ordnungsgem eingegeben wurde, blinkt die
Note: REMOTE MODE-Taste/Remote-Anzeige einmal langsam.
L'elemento lampeggiante del telecomando varia a seconda del modello del ricevitore AV. Hinweise:
Il telecomando preconfigurato con preselezioni per diversi apparecchi. Inserendo un codice Das blinkende Element auf der Fernbedienung unterscheidet sich je nach AV-Receiver-Modell.
dall'elenco dei codici telecomando, possibile attivare la relativa preselezione per tale Die Fernbedienung ist mit den Voreinstellungen der Fernbedienung der verschiedenen
apparecchio. Komponenten vorkonfiguriert. Indem ein Code aus der Liste der Fernbedienungscodes
Se sono presenti pi codici relativi allo stesso produttore, provare a inserirli uno a uno finch eingegeben wird, knnen Sie die entsprechende Voreinstellung fr die Komponente aktivieren.
non si arrivi al codice corrispondente dell'apparecchio. Wenn es mehrere Codes gibt, die sich auf einen Hersteller beziehen, versuchen Sie sie einzeln
A seconda del modello e dell'anno dell'apparecchio, la compatibilit non garantita. einzugeben, bis einer mit Ihrer Komponente bereinstimmt.
Con alcuni modelli, il telecomando pu non funzionare o la sua compatibilit pu essere limitata Dies hngt vom Modell und Herstellungsjahr Ihrer Komponente ab und die Kompatibilitt ist
a una parte della funzionalit dell'apparecchio. nicht garantiert.
Inoltre, non possibile aggiungere nuovi codici alle preselezioni esistenti del telecomando. Es kann sein, dass bei einigen Modellen die Fernbedienung nicht funktioniert oder ihre
I codici telecomando specificati sono validi alla data della stampa del presente documento, ma Kompatibilitt sich auf nur auf Teile der Funktionalitt der Komponente beschrnkt.
sono soggetti a variazioni da parte del produttore. Abgesehen davon ist es nicht mglich, den bestehenden Voreinstellungen der Fernbedienung
neue Codes hinzuzufgen.
Obwohl die angegebenen Fernbedienungscodes dem Stand bei Drucklegung entsprechen, sind
nderungen durch den Hersteller vorbehalten.

3
Remote Control Codes
Afstandsbedieningscodes Fjrrstyrningskoder

1 Houd terwijl u de REMOTE MODE toets ingedrukt houdt waarvoor u een code
wilt toewijzen de [DISPLAY] toets ingedrukt (ongeveer 3 seconden).
1 Hll ned knappen fr det REMOTE MODE som du vill tilldela en kod samtidigt
som du trycker och hller ned [DISPLAY] (i cirka 3 sekunder).
De toets REMOTE MODE (afstandsbedieningsmodus) / Het indicatielampje REMOTE MODE-knapp/Fjrrindikatorlampa.
afstandsbediening gaat branden. P Integra-produkter, r knappnamnens begynnelsebokstav en versal. Till exempel,
Op producten van Integra staan de namen van de toetesn in hoofdletters. Bijvoorbeeld, Fjrrlge-knapp och Display-knapp.
de toetsen Remote Mode en Display. Anmrkningar:
Opmerkingen: Fjrrkontrollkoder kan inte anges fr knapparna [RECEIVER] och flerzonsknappen.
Er kunnen geen afstandsbedieningscodes worden ingevoerd voor [RECEIVER] en de multi Endast fjrrkontrollkoder fr tv kan anges fr [TV].
zone-toets. Frutom [RECEIVER], [TV] och flerzonsknappen, kan fjrrkontrollkoder fr vilken som helst
Alleen TV afstandsbedieningscodes kunnen worden ingevoerd voor [TV]. kategori tilldelas fr knapparna REMOTE MODE. Dessa knappar fungerar dock ven som
Behalve voor [RECEIVER], [TV] en de multi zone-toets, kunnen afstandsbedieningscodes ingngvljarknappar, s anvnd en knapp fr REMOTE MODE som motsvarar ingngen som
vanuit elke categorie worden toegewezen aan de REMOTE MODE toetsen. Deze toetsen du ansluter utrustningen till. Till exempel, om du ansluter din CD-spelare till CD-ingngen ska
werken overigens ook als ingangsselectortoetsen, kies dus een REMOTE MODE toets die du vlja [TV/CD] nr du anger dess fjrrkontrollkod.
overeenkomt met de ingang waarop u uw component wilt aansluiten. Kies indien u bijvoorbeeld
uw CD-speler aansluit op de CD-ingang de [TV/CD] toets bij het invoeren van de 2 Anvnd sifferknapparna fr att ange den femsiffriga koden inom 30 sekunder.
afstandsbedieningscode.
REMOTE MODE-knapp/Fjrrindikatorlampa blinkar tv gnger.
Om fjrrkontrollkoden inte stlldes in, blinkar REMOTE MODE-
2 Gebruik binnen 30 seconden de cijfertoetsen om de 5-cijferige
afstandsbedieningscode in te voeren.
knappen/fjrrindikatorn lngsamt en gng.
Anmrkningar:
De toets REMOTE MODE (afstandsbedieningsmodus) / Het indicatielampje Det blinkande elementet p fjrrkontrollen skiljer sig t beroende p din modell av AV-receiver.
afstandsbediening knippert tweemaal. Fjrrkontrollen har frkonfigurerats med frvalda kanaler p fjrrkontrollen fr olika
Indien de afstandsbedieningscode niet met succes wordt ingevoerd, zal de toets komponenter. Genom att ange en kod frn fjrrkontrollkodlistan, kan du aktivera relevanta
REMOTE MODE/Remote-indicator eenmaal traag knipperen. frvalda kanaler fr den utrustningen.
Opmerkingen: Nr det finns flera olika koder fr en tillverkare ska du frska att ange dem en och en tills de
Het knippergedeelte van de afstandsbediening zal verschillen ten opzichte van het model van stmmer verens med din utrustning.
uw AV-receiver. Beroende p utrustningens modell och rgng, gr det inte att garantera kompatibilitet.
De afstandsbediening is voorgeprogrammeerd met voorkeuzetoetsen van verschillende P vissa modeller kan det hnda att fjrrkontrollen inte fungerar eller s kan dess kompatibilitet
componenten. Door het invullen van een code uit de afstandsbediening codelijst kunt u de vara begrnsad till en del av utrustningens funktion.
voorkeuzetoets voor die component activeren. Dessutom gr det inte att lgga till nya koder till fjrrkontrollens existerande frvalda kanaler.
Wanneer er meerdere codes gerelateerd zijn aan n fabrikant, probeer deze dan een voor een ven om erhllna fjrrkontrollkoder r korrekta vid tryckningen, kan de ndras av tillverkaren.
totdat de juiste code overeenkomt met uw component.
Afhankelijk van het model en het bouwjaar van uw component is de compatibiliteit niet
gegarandeerd.
Bij sommige modellen werkt de afstandsbediening mogelijk niet of is de compatibiliteit ervan
beperkt tot een deel van de functionaliteit van de component.
Daarnaast is het niet mogelijk om nieuwe codes aan de bestaande voorkeuzetoetsen van de
afstandsbediening toe te voegen.
Hoewel de gegeven afstandsbedieningscodes correct zijn op het moment van afdrukken, kunnen
deze door de fabrikant gewijzigd worden.

4
Remote Control Codes

1 REMOTE MODE 1 REMOTE MODE [DISPLAY


[DISPLAY] 3 ] 3
REMOTE MODE / REMOTE MODE /
Integra Remote Mode Integra Remote Mode
Display Display

[RECEIER] [RECEIVER ]
[TV] [TV ]
[RECEIVER] [TV] REMOTE MODE [RECEIVER ][TV ] REMOTE MODE

REMOTE MODE REMOTE MODE
CD CD [TV/CD] CD CD [TV/CD /CD]

2 30 5 2 30 5
REMOTE MODE / REMOTE MODE /
REMOTE MODE / REMOTE MODE /


AV AV







5
Remote Control Codes

Cable Set Top Box Cable Set Top Box Cable Set Top Box Cable/PVR Combination
ADB 02254, 02769 Neuf TV 03107 Visiopass 00817 Time Warner 01376, 01877, 02187
Aon 02769 Noos 00817 VTR 01376 UPC 01582
Arris 02187 NTL 01068, 01060 WideOpenWest 01877 Videotron 01877
AT&T 00858 Numericable 02767 Ziggo 00660, 01666, 02015, VTR 01376
Bright House 01376, 01877 Ono 01068, 01562 02142, 02447, 02774 WideOpenWest 01877
BT Vision 02294 Optus 01060 Ziggo 02142
Cable & Wireless 01068 Orange 00817
Cable/PVR Combination
Cable One 01376, 01877 Pace 01376, 01877, 01068, Arris 02187 IPTV
Cablecom 01582 01060, 01982 Bright House 01376, 01877 ADB 02254, 02769
Cablevision 01376, 01877 Panasonic 01488, 01982 Cable One 01376, 01877 Aon 02769
Charter 01376, 01877, 02187 Philips 00817, 01582, 02294, Cablevision 01376, 01877 AT&T 00858
02767 Charter 01376, 01877, 02187 BT Vision 02294
Cisco 01877, 00858, 01982,
02345, 02378 Pioneer 01877, 01500 Cisco 01877, 01982 Canal+ 02657
Com Hem 00817, 00660, 01666, RCN 01376 Comcast 01376, 01877, 01982, Cisco 00858, 02345, 02378
02015, 02447 Rogers 01877 02187
Kreatel 01385
Comcast 01376, 01877, 01982, Sagem 00817 Cox 01376, 01877
mio TV 02802
02187 Samsung 01877, 01060, 01666, Digeo 02187
Motorola 01376, 00858, 01998,
Cox 01376, 01877 02015, 02774 Freebox 01482 02378
Daeryung 01877 Scientific Atlanta 01877, 00858, 01982, Humax 02142, 03051, 03053 Neuf TV 03107
Digeo 02187 02345 Insight 01376, 01877 Pace 02657
DX Antenna 01500 SFR 03107 J:COM 03051, 03053 Scientific Atlanta 00858, 02345
France Telecom 00817 Shaw 01376 Knology 01877 SFR 03107
Freebox 01482 SingTel 01998, 02802 Mediacom 01376, 01877 SingTel 01998, 02802
Fujitsu 01497 Sony 01460 Motorola 01376 TeliaSonera 01385
Humax 00660, 02142, 02447, Stofa 02015 Moxi 02187 Telus 02345
03051, 03053 Suddenlink 01376, 01877 Numericable 02767 Thomson 02769
Insight 01376, 01877 Sumitomo 01500 Pace 01877 Verizon 02378
J:COM 03051, 03053 Telewest 01068 Panasonic 01982
Knology 01877 TeliaSonera 01385 Philips 01582, 02767 IPTV/PVR Combination
Kreatel 01385 Telus 02345 Pioneer 01877 ADB 02769
Macab 00817 Thomson 01582, 01982, 02769 Rogers 01877 Aon 02769
Mediacom 01376, 01877 Time Warner 01376, 01877, 02187 Samsung 01877 AT&T 00858
mio TV 02802 Toshiba 01509 Scientific Atlanta 01877, 01982 BT Vision 02294
Motorola 01376, 00858, 01562, UPC 01582 Shaw 01376 Cisco 00858, 02345, 02378
01982, 01998, 02378 Verizon 02378 Suddenlink 01376, 01877 Kreatel 01385
Moxi 02187 Videotron 01877 Thomson 01582 Motorola 00858, 02378
NEC 01496 Virgin Media 01068, 01060

6
Remote Control Codes

IPTV/PVR Combination CD CD MD
Neuf TV 03107 Harman/Kardon 70157 Rotel 70157 Onkyo 70868
Philips 02294 Hitachi 70032 SAE 70157 Sony 70490, 70000
Scientific Atlanta 00858 Integra 71817, 70101 Sansui 70157 TEAC 72977
SFR 03107 JVC 70072 SAST 70157 Yamaha 70490
Verizon 02378 Kenwood 70626, 70157, 70036 Siemens 70157
Krell 70157 Silsonic 70036 Cassette Deck
CD/Cassette Dock Linn 70157 Simaudio 70157 Aiwa 40029
TASCAM 73095 Loewe 70157 Sonic Frontiers 70157 Arcam 40076
Magnavox 70157 Sony 70490, 70000 Audiolab 40029
CD Carver 40029
Marantz 70626, 70029, 70157 Sylvania 70157
Advantage 70032 Denon 40076
Matsui 70157 TAG McLaren 70157
AH! 70157 Grundig 40029
MCS 70029 Tandy 70032
Aiwa 70157 Harman/Kardon 40029
Memorex 70032 TASCAM 73533, 73095
Arcam 70157 Inkel 40070
Meridian 70157 TEAC 73531, 73551, 73532
Atoll Electronique 70157 JVC 40244
Micromega 70157 Technics 70029, 70303
Audio Research 70157 Kenwood 40070
Miro 70000 Thorens 70157
Audiolab 70157 Magnavox 40029
Mission 70157 Thule Audio 70157
Audiomeca 70157 Marantz 40029
Myryad 70157 Traxdata 70626
Audioton 70157 Myryad 40029
NAD 70000, 70721 Universum 70157
AVI 70157 Onkyo 42157
Naim 70157 Victor 70072
Balanced Audio 70157 Optimus 40027
NSM 70157 Wards 70000, 70032, 70157
Technology
Onkyo 71817 Yamaha 70490, 70032, 70036 Philips 40029
Cairn 70157
Optimus 70000, 70032 Zonda 70157 Pioneer 40027
California Audio Labs 70029, 70303
Panasonic 70029, 70303 Polk Audio 40029
Cambridge 70157
Philips 70626, 70157 CD-R Radiola 40029
Cambridge Audio 70157
Pioneer 70032, 70101 Denon 70626, 70766 RCA 40027
Carver 70157
Polk Audio 70157 JVC 70072 Revox 40029
CCE 70157
Primare 70157 Kenwood 70626 Sansui 40029
Cyrus 70157
Proton 70157 Marantz 70626 Sony 40243
Denon 70626, 70766
QED 70157 Onkyo 71323 Thorens 40029
DKK 70000
Quad 70157 Philips 70626 Victor 40244
DMX Electronics 70157
Quasar 70029 Sony 70000 Wards 40027, 40029
Dynaco 70157
Radiola 70157 TASCAM 71830, 72304 Yamaha 40097
Genexxa 70000, 70032
RCA 70032
Goldmund 70157 CD-R/MD Accessory
Restek 70157
Grundig 70157 TASCAM 73511 Apple 81115
Revox 70157

7
Remote Control Codes

Accessory Satellite Set Top Box Satellite Set Top Box Satellite Set Top Box
Jamo 82228 Alba 01284 Centrex 01457 Durabrand 01284
Logitech 82182 Allvision 01334 CGV 01413, 01567 Echostar 00775, 00853, 01323,
Onkyo 82990, 81993, 82351 Amstrad 00847, 01175, 01662, Chess 01334, 01626 01409, 02527
Polk Audio 82228 01693 CityCom 01176 Eco-Star 01413
Ansonic 02418 Clatronic 01413 Edision 01631
Video - Accessory Arnion 01300 Clayton 01626 Elap 01413, 01567
ADB 02254, 02769 ASCI 01334 Com Hem 01176, 01915 Elbe 02418
Aon 02769 AssCom 00853 Comag 01413 Energy Sistem 01631, 02418
Apple 02615 Astro 00173, 01100 Comsat 01413 Engel 01251
AT&T 00858 Atlanta 02418 Coship 01457 EuroLine 01251
BT Vision 02294 Atsat 01300 Crown 01284 Europhon 01334
Canal+ 02657 AtSky 01334 CS 01631 Europsat 01413, 01611
Cisco 00858, 02345, 02378 Audiola 02418 Cyfra+ 01409 Expressvu 00775
Kreatel 01385 Aurora 00879, 00642, 01433 Cyfrowy Polsat 00853, 02527 Fagor 01611
mio TV 02802 Austar 00879, 00642, 01259 D-box 00723, 01114 Ferguson 01291
Motorola 01376, 00858, 01998, Avanit 01631 Dantax 01626 Finlux 01626
02378 Awa 02418 Fly Com 01457
Denver 02418
Neuf TV 03107 Axil 01413, 01457, 02418 FMD 01413, 01457
Dgtec 01631, 02418
Pace 02657 Axitronic 01626 Foxtel 00879, 01176, 01356
Dick Smith 02418
Philips 02294 Balmet 01457 Electronics Freesat 02408
Scientific Atlanta 00858, 02345 Bell ExpressVu 00775 Digi Raum Electronics 01176 Fuba 00173, 01251
SFR 03107 Belson 02418 Digiality 01334 Galaxis 00853, 00879
SingTel 01998, 02802 Big Sat 01457 Digihome 01284 General Satellite 01176
TeliaSonera 01385 Black Diamond 01284 DigiLogic 01284 Globo 01251, 01334, 01626
Telus 02345 Blaupunkt 00173 DigiQuest 01300, 01457, 01631 GOI 00775
Thomson 02769 Boshmann 01413, 01631 Digisky 01457 Gold Box 00853
Verizon 02378 Boston 01251 DigitalBox 01100, 01631 Gold Vision 01631
Boxer 01458 Digiwave 01631 GoldMaster 01334
Receiver
British Sky 00847, 01175, 01662 DirecTV 01377, 00099 Goodmans 01284, 01291
Onkyo 52503 Broadcasting Dish Network 00775 Gradiente 00099, 00887
BskyB 00847, 01175, 01662 Dishpro 00775 Grandin 01626
Satellite Set Top Box Bush 01284, 01291, 01626 DishTV 01300 Grocos 01409, 01457
@sat 01300 Canal Digital 00853, 01334 DRE 01176 Grundig 00847, 00853, 00173,
@Sky 01334 Canal Satellite 00853, 02657 00879, 01284, 01291
Dream Multimedia 01237
Acoustic Solutions 01284 Canal+ 00853, 02657 Haier 02418
DSE 02280, 02418
ADB 00642, 00887, 01259 CanalSat 00853, 02657 Hallo 01626
DSTV 00879, 00642, 01433
Akura 01626

8
Remote Control Codes

Satellite Set Top Box Satellite Set Top Box Satellite Set Top Box Satellite Set Top Box
Hama 01567 Leiko 01626 Pace 00847, 00853, 00887, Sat Industrie 01611
Hanseatic 01100 Lemon 01334 01175, 01323, 01356, SAT+ 01409
01423, 01662, 01693,
Hirschmann 00173 Lenoxx 01611 Satplus 01100
01850, 02059, 02060,
Hitachi 01284 Linsar 01284 02211, 02657 SatyCon 01631
Hornet 01300 Listo 01626 Pacific 01284 Schaub Lorenz 02418
HTS 00775 Lodos 01284 Palcom 01409, 01611 Schneider 01206, 01251
Humax 01377, 01176, 01427, Logik 01284 Panasat 00879, 01433 Schwaiger 01334, 01457, 01631
01675, 01808, 01882, Macab 00853 Sedea Electronique 01206, 01626
Panasonic 00847, 01304, 01404,
01915, 02144, 02408,
Manhattan 01300 03099 SEG 01251, 01284, 01626
02616
Maspro 00173 Panda 00173 Servimat 01611
ID Digital 01176
Matsui 00173, 01284, 01626 Pass 01567 ServiSat 01251
ID Sat 01334
Maximum 01334 peeKTon 01457, 02418 Shark 01631
ILLUSION sat 01631
Mediabox 00853 Philips 00099, 00853, 00173, Sherwood 01409
Imperial 01195, 01334
Mediacom 01206 01114, 00887, 00133, Siemens 00173, 01334, 01626,
Indovision 00887 02211
MediaSat 00853 02418
iNETBOX 01237 Phoenix 02418
Medion 01334, 01626 Sigmatek 02418
Inno Hit 01626 Pino 01334
MegaSat 01631 SKY 00099, 00847, 00887,
Innova 00099 Pioneer 00853, 01308 01175, 01662, 01693,
Metronic 01334, 01413, 01631,
inVion 02418 PMB 01611 01850, 02754
02418
iotronic 01413 Premiere 00723 SKY Brazil 00887
Metz 00173
ISkyB 00887 Pro Basic 00853 SKY Deutschland 02754
Moserbaer 01251
ITT 02418 Proline 01284 SKY Italia 00853, 01693, 01850
Movistar 02527, 02761
ITT Nokia 00723 QNS 01404 SKY New Zealand 02211
Multichoice 00879, 00642, 01433,
Jadeworld 00642 02059, 02060 RCA 01291 SKY PerfecTV! 02299, 02616, 03099
Jaeger 01334 MySky 01356, 01693, 01850 Regal 01251 Sky XL 01251
JVC 00775 NEOTION 01334 Roadstar 00853 Sky+ 01175, 01662
KabelBW 01195, 01882, 01915 Netsat 00099, 00887 Rollmaster 01413 Skymaster 01334, 01409, 01567,
Kaon 01300 01611
Nikko 00723 Rownsonic 01567
Kathrein 00173, 01561, 01567 Skymax 01413
Nokia 00853, 00723, 01223 SAB 01251, 01300, 01631
Kenwood 00853 Skyplus 01175, 01334
Nordmende 01611 Sagem 01114
Koenig 01631 SkySat 01100
NPG 01631 Saivod 02418
Kreiling 01626 Skyvision 01334
Onn 01284 Samsung 01377, 00853, 01175,
Kreiselmeyer 00173 01206, 01458, 01662, SM Electronic 01409
Optex 01413, 01611, 01626
L&S Electronic 01334 02986 Smart 01404, 01413, 01631
Optus 00879, 01356
LaSAT 00173 Sansui 01251 SmartVision 01457
Orbis 01334
Lava 01631 Sanyo 01626 Sony 00847, 00853, 01558,
Orbitech 01100, 01195
Sat Control 01300 02299

9
Remote Control Codes

Satellite Set Top Box Satellite Set Top Box SAT/PVR Combination SAT/PVR Combination
Star 00887 UBC 00642 Canal+ 02657 SKY Deutschland 02754
Stream System 01300 UEC 00879, 01356 CanalSat 02657 SKY Italia 01693, 01850
Strong 00853, 00879, 01284, United 01251, 01626, 02418 Cyfrowy Polsat 02527 SKY New Zealand 02211
01300, 01409, 01626, Unitymedia 01882 DigiQuest 01300 SKY PerfecTV! 02299, 03099
02418
Universum 00173, 01251 DirecTV 01377, 00099, 20739 Sky+ 01662
Sunny 01300
Variosat 00173 Dish Network 00775 Skyplus 01175, 01334
Sunstar 00642
VEA 02418 Dishpro 00775 Smart 01631
Supernova 00887
Vestel 01251, 01284 Dream Multimedia 01237 Sony 02299
Supratech 01413
Viasat 01195 Echostar 00775, 02527 Stream System 01300
Systec 01334
Vision 01626 Edision 01631 Strong 01300
Sytech 02418
Visiosat 01413, 01457 Expressvu 00775 Sunny 01300
TBoston 01251, 02418
Vitecom 01413 Foxtel 01356 TechniSat 01195
TEAC 01251
Vivax 02418 Humax 01176, 01427, 01675, Technosat 01206
Technical 01626 01808
Volcasat 02418 Telefonica 02527
Technika 01284 ID Sat 01334
Wavelength 01413 Telestar 01195
TechniSat 01100, 01195 iNETBOX 01237
Wharfedale 01284 Thomson 01175, 01662
Technosat 01206 Kaon 01300
Wisi 00173 Topfield 01206
Techwood 01251, 01284, 01626 Kathrein 01561
Worldsat 01251 Viasat 01195
TELE System 01251, 01409, 01611 Maximum 01334
Woxter 02418 Xtreme 01300
Telefonica 02527, 02761 Mediacom 01206
Xsat 00847, 01323
Telestar 01100, 01195, 01251, MegaSat 01631 Television
Xtreme 01300
01334, 01626
Yakumo 01413 Movistar 02527 A.R. Systems 10556, 10037
Televes 01300, 01334
Yes 00887 Multichoice 02059, 02060 Accent 10037
Televisa 00887
Zehnder 01251, 01334, 01413, MySky 01356, 01693, 01850 Acer 11339
Tevion 01409
01631 NEOTION 01334 Acoustic Solutions 11037, 11667
Thomson 00847, 00853, 01175,
Zinwell 02280, 02761 Pace 01175, 01356, 01423, Action 10650
01046, 01291, 01662
01662, 01693, 01850, Addison 10653
Tonna 01611 02059, 02060, 02211,
SAT/PVR Combination AEG 11037, 11324
Topfield 01206 02657
@sat 01300 Agfaphoto 12719
Toshiba 01284 Panasonic 01304, 03099
Amstrad 01175, 01662, 01693 Aiko 10037
Trevi 01251 Philips 00099
Atsat 01300 Aim 10037, 10499
Triax 00853, 01251, 01291, Samsung 01175, 01206, 01662
Bell ExpressVu 00775 Akai 10178, 10556, 10037,
01413, 01611, 01626, Sat Control 01300
01631 British Sky 01175, 01662 10714, 10715, 10208,
Broadcasting Schneider 01206 11675
Tricolor TV 01176
BskyB 01175, 01662 Sedea Electronique 01206 Akiba 10037
True Visions 02408
Canal Satellite 02657 SKY 01175, 01662, 01693, Akito 10037
Twinner 01611 01850, 02754

10
Remote Control Codes

Television Television Television Television


Akura 10171, 10037, 10714, Belstar 11037 Classic 10499 DMTech 12001
10668, 11037, 11363, Beon 10037 Clatronic 10037, 10714, 11324 Domeos 10668
11585, 11667, 11709
Berthen 10556, 10668 Clayton 11037 Drean 10037
Alba 10037, 10714, 10668,
Bestar 10037 Condor 10037 DSE 10698
11037, 11585
Bexa 12493 Conrowa 10698 Dual 10037, 11037, 11585,
Alien 11037
Black Diamond 11037 Contec 10037 11667
Allstar 10037
Blaupunkt 10195 Cosmel 10037 Durabrand 10178, 10171, 10714,
Amstrad 10171, 10037, 11037 11037, 11652
Blue Sky 10556, 10037, 10625, CPTEC 10625, 11363
Anam 10037 Dux 10037
10714, 10668, 11037, Crown 10037, 10714, 10668,
Anam National 10037, 10650 10715, 10499, 11324, DX Antenna 11817, 13817
11037, 10715, 10208,
Andersson 11585 11363, 11652, 11709 11652 Dynatron 10037
Anitech 10037 Boca 11652 Cyberpix 11667 Dynex 12049
Ansonic 10037, 10668 Boman 11324 D-Vision 10556, 10037 e-motion 11709
AOC 10178, 10625, 11365 Bork 11363 Daewoo 10178, 10556, 10037, E:max 11324
Ardem 10037, 10714 BPL 10037, 10208 10634, 10499, 12098 Easy Living 11666, 11709
Arena 10037 Brandt 10625, 10714, 10560 Dansai 10037, 10208 ECE 10037
Aristona 10556, 10037 Brimax 11709 Dantax 10714, 11037, 10715, Elbe 10556, 10037
ART 11037 Brinkmann 10037, 10668 11652
Electrograph 11755
Art Mito 11585 Brionvega 10037 Datsura 10208
Element 11886
Asberg 10037 Bush 10556, 10037, 10714, Dawa 10037
Elfunk 11037
Astra 10037 10668, 11037, 10698, Daytron 10037
ELG 10037
10208, 11585, 11652, De Graaf 10208
ATD 10698 Elin 10037
11667, 12719
Atlantic 10037 DEC 11709
Byd:sign 12140, 12209 Elite 10037
Audiosonic 10037, 10714, 10715 Decca 10037
Camper 10037 Emerson 10178, 10171, 10037,
Audioworld 10698 Denver 10037, 11709 10714, 10668, 11394,
Carad 10668, 11037
Aventura 10171 Desmet 10037 11864, 11886
Carena 10037
Axxon 10714 Diamant 10037 Envision 11365, 11506
Carrefour 10037
Baird 10208 Diamond 10698 Epson 11379
Cascade 10037
Barco 10556 Dick Smith 10698 Erres 10037
Casio 10037 Electronics
Basic Line 10556, 10037, 10668, ESA 10171
Cathay 10037 Digatron 10037
11037 ESC 10037
CCE 10037 Digihome 11667
Baur 10037, 10195, 10512 Euroman 10037
Centrum 11037 Digiline 10037, 10668
Beaumark 10178 Europa 10037
Centurion 10037 Digitek 11709
Beijing 10208 Europhon 10037
Changhong 10508 Digitor 10037, 10698
Beko 10037, 10714, 10715, Evesham 11248, 11667
11652 Chimei 11666 Dixi 10037 Excello 11037
Belson 10698 Clarivox 10037 DL 11363 Exquisit 10037

11
Remote Control Codes

Television Television Television Television


Ferguson 10037, 10625, 10560, Goodmans 10556, 10037, 10625, Hoeher 10714 Karcher 10714, 11324
10195, 11037, 11585 10714, 10560, 10668, Hornyphon 10037 Kathrein 10556
Fidelity 10171, 10037, 10512 10634, 11037, 10499,
Hugoson 11666 Kendo 10037, 11037, 11585
11585, 11667
Finlandia 10208 Humax 11295 Kennex 11037
Gorenje 11585
Finlux 10556, 10037, 10714, Hypson 10556, 10037, 10714, Kioto 10556
10715, 11248, 11667 Gradiente 10037
10668, 11037, 10715 Kiton 10037, 10668
Firstline 10556, 10037, 10714, Graetz 10714
Hyundai 11037, 10698 KLL 10037
10668, 11037, 10208, Granada 10037, 10560, 10208
Iberia 10037 Kneissel 10556, 10037, 10499
11363 Grandin 10556, 10037, 10714,
ICE 10037 Koenig 10037
Fisher 10208 10668, 11037, 10715,
11652 iLo 11394 Kolin 10150, 10037, 11610,
Flint 10037
Grundig 10556, 10037, 10195, Imperial 10037 11755
Formenti 10037
11223, 11667, 12625 Indiana 10037 Kolster 10037
Fraba 10037
GVA 11363, 12098 Ingelen 10714 Konka 10037, 10714
Friac 10037, 10499
H&B 12001 Inno Hit 11037, 11585 Korpel 10037
Fujicom 11709
Haier 10037, 10698, 10508 Innova 10037 Kosmos 10037
Fujitsu 10809
Hallmark 10178 Insignia 10171, 11423, 12049 Kunlun 10208
Fujitsu Siemens 10809, 11248, 11666
Hankook 10178 Integra 11807, 13100, 13500 L&S Electronic 10714
Funai 10171, 10714, 10668,
11037, 11394, 11666, Hanseatic 10556, 10037, 10625, Interbuy 10037 Lavic 11363
11817, 13817 10714, 10634, 10499, Interfunk 10037, 10512 Lavis 11037
12001
G-Hanz 11363 Internal 10556 Lecson 10037
Hantarex 10037
Gaba 11037 Intervision 10037 Lenco 10037, 11037
Hantor 10037
Galaxi 10037 Irradio 10037 Leyco 10037
Harwood 10037
Galaxis 10037 IRT 10698 LG 10178, 10556, 10037,
Hauppauge 10037 10714, 10715, 10698,
Gateway 11755 Isukai 10037
HB 11324 11423, 11768, 11840,
GE 10178, 11454, 10625, ITS 10037
HCM 10037 12182, 12358, 12424,
10560 ITT 10208 12834
GEC 10037 Highline 10037
ITT Nokia 10208 Liesenkoetter 10037
Genesis 10037 Hinari 10037, 10208
ITV 10037 Lifetec 10037, 10714, 10668,
Genexxa 10037 Hisawa 10714
JGC 11709 11037, 12001
GFM 10171, 11864, 11886 Hisense 10556, 10508, 10208,
Jinfeng 10208 Linsar 11585
11363, 12098
Godrej 11585 Jinxing 10556, 10037, 10698 Local India TV 10208
Hitachi 10150, 10178, 10037,
Goldfunk 10668 JMB 10556, 10634, 10499 Local Malaysia TV 10698
10634, 11037, 10508,
GoldStar 10178, 10037, 10714, 10499, 10578, 11576, Jubilee 10556 Lodos 11037
10715 11585, 11643, 11667, JVC 10650, 10653, 10508, Loewe 10037, 10512, 11884
11691, 12433 11428, 11601, 12271 Logik 11037, 10698
Hitachi Fujian 10150 Kaisui 10037 Logix 10668
Hitec 10698

12
Remote Control Codes

Television Television Television Television


Luma 11037 Metronic 10625 NetTV 11755 Orline 10037
Lumatron 10037, 10668 Metz 10037, 10668, 10195, Neufunk 10556, 10037, 10714 Ormond 10668, 11037
Lumenio 10037 11037 New Tech 10556, 10037 Osaki 10556, 10037
Lux May 10037 MGA 10150, 10178 Newave 10178 Osio 10037
Luxor 11037, 10208 Micromaxx 10037, 10714, 10668, Nikkai 10037 Osume 10037
11037, 11324, 12001
LXI 10178 Nikkei 10714 Otto Versand 10556, 10037, 10195,
Microspot 11614 10512
M Electronic 10037, 10714, 10634, Nikko 10178
10195, 10512, 11652 Mikomi 11037, 11585 Pacific 10556, 10714, 11037,
Nokia 10208
Madison 10037 Minato 10037 11324
Norcent 11365
Magnavox 10171, 11454, 11365, Minerva 10195, 11248 Palladium 10556, 10037, 10714
Nordmende 10037, 10714, 10560,
11506, 11755, 11867, Ministry Of Sound 11667 10195, 11585, 11667, Palsonic 10037, 10698
12372 Minoka 10037 12001 Panama 10037
Magnum 10037, 10714, 10715 Mirai 11666 Normerel 10037 Panasonic 11480, 10037, 10650,
Manesth 10037 Mitsubishi 10150, 11250, 10178, Nortek 10668 10508, 10208, 11636,
Manhattan 10037, 10668, 11037 10556, 10037, 11037, 12170
Novatronic 10037
Marantz 11454, 10556, 10037 10512, 11171 Panavision 10037
Novita 11585
Mark 10037, 10714, 10715 Mivar 10609 Panda 10698, 10508, 10208
Nu-Tec 10698
Master's 10499 Moree 10037 Pansonic 11636
O.K.Line 11037, 11324
Mastro 10698 Morgan's 10037 Penney 10178
Oceanic 10208
Masuda 10037 Moserbaer 11585 Perdio 10037
Odys 12719
Matsui 10556, 10037, 10714, MTC 10512 Perfekt 10037
Okano 10037
10195, 11037, 10208, MTlogic 10714 Petters 10037
OKI 11585, 11667
11666, 11667 Mudan 10208 Philco 10178, 10171, 10037,
Olevia 11610, 12124
Matsushita 10650 Multitec 10037, 10668, 11037 11394
Omni 10698
Maxent 11755 Multitech 10037 Philips 10178, 10171, 11454,
Onei 11667 10556, 10037, 10512,
Maxess 12493 Myrica 11666
Onida 10653 10605, 10690, 11394,
Meck 10698 Myryad 10556
Onimax 10714 11506, 11867, 12372
Mediator 10556, 10037 NAD 10178, 10037
Onix 10698 Phocus 10714, 11652
Medion 10556, 10037, 10714, Naiko 10037
Onkyo 11807, 13100, 13500 Phoenix 10037
10668, 11037, 10698,
Nakimura 10037 Phonola 10556, 10037
10512, 11248, 11585, Onn 11667, 11709
11667, 12001, 12719 National 10508, 10208 Pioneer 10037, 10698, 10512,
Onyx 11709
Megatron 10178 NEC 10178, 10653, 10508, 11457, 11636, 12171
Opera 10037, 10714
10499 Plantron 10037
MEI 11037 Optimus 10650
Neckermann 10556, 10037 Playsonic 10037, 10714, 10715,
Memorex 10150, 10178, 11037 Orbit 10037
NEI 10037, 11037 11652
Mercury 10037 Orion 10556, 10037, 10714,
NEO 11324 Powerpoint 10037, 10698
Mermaid 10037 11037, 12001
Netsat 10037 Prinston 11037, 10715

13
Remote Control Codes

Television Television Television Television


Profitronic 10037 Rowa 10037, 10698 Siera 10556, 10037 Svasa 10208
Proline 10037, 10625, 10634, Saba 10625, 10714, 10560 Silva 10037 Swisstec 11614, 11775
11037 Sagem 10618 Silva Schneider 10037 Sylvania 10171, 11394, 11864,
Prosonic 10037, 10714, 10668, Saivod 10037, 10668, 11037 Silver 10715 11886
11324, 11585, 11667, Symphonic 10171, 11394
Salora 10208, 12001 SilverCrest 11037
11709, 12001
Sampo 10178, 10171, 10650, Sinudyne 10037 Synco 10178, 11755
Protech 10037, 10668, 11037
11755 SKY 10037, 11614, 11775 Syntax 11610
Proton 10178
Samsung 10178, 10556, 10037, Skyworth 10037, 10698 Sysline 10037
ProVision 10556, 10037, 10714, 10618, 10650, 10208,
Sliding 11324 Tacico 10178
11324 12051
SLX 10668 Talent 10178
Pvision 12001 Sansui 10171, 10037, 10714,
Solavox 10037 Tashiko 10650
Pye 10556, 10037 11248, 12001
Soniko 10037 Tatung 10037, 11248, 11324
Qingdao 10208 Sanyo 11037, 10508, 10208,
11142, 11365, 11585, Soniq 12493 TCL 10698, 12403, 12434,
Quasar 10650
11667, 11974 13183
Quelle 10037, 10668, 10195, Sonitron 10208
SBR 10556, 10037 TCM 10714, 12001
11037, 10512 Sonneclair 10037
Schaub Lorenz 10714, 11324, 11363, TEAC 10178, 10171, 10037,
R-Line 10037 Sonoko 10037
11667, 12001 10714, 10668, 11037,
Radiola 10556, 10037 Sonolor 10208 10698, 10512, 11248,
Schneider 10556, 10037, 10714,
Radiomarelli 10037 Sontec 10037 11363, 11709, 11755
10668, 11037
RadioShack 10178, 10037 Sony 10810, 11505, 11167, Tec 10037
Schoentech 11037
Radiotone 10037, 10668, 11037 11651, 11825 Tech Line 10037, 10668
Scotch 10178
RCA 10178, 11454, 10625, Soundesign 10178 Technica 11037
Scott 10178
10560, 10618, 11781, Soundwave 10037, 11037, 10715 Technics 10556, 10650
12247, 12403, 12434, Sears 10178, 10171
Sowa 10178 Technika 11667
12746, 12932 Seaway 10634
Squareview 10171 TechniSat 10556
Realistic 10178 Seelver 11037
Standard 10037, 11037, 11709 Technisson 10714, 11652
Recor 10037 SEG 10037, 10668, 11037,
12719 Starlite 10037 Techno 11585
Rectiligne 10037
SEI 10037 Strato 10037 Technosonic 10556, 10625, 10499,
Redstar 10037
SunBriteTV 11610 11324
Reflex 10037, 10668, 11037 Sei-Sinudyne 10037
Sungoo 11248 Techvision 11709
Relisys 11585 Serie Dorada 10178
Sunny 10037 Techwood 11037, 11667
Remotec 10171, 10037 Shanghai 10208
Sunstar 10037 Tecnimagen 10556
Reoc 10714 Sharp 10650, 10818, 11165,
11423, 11659 Sunstech 12001 Teco 10178, 10653
Revox 10037
Shintoshi 10037 Sunwood 10037 Tedelex 10208, 11709
RFT 10037
Shivaki 10178, 10037 Supersonic 10208 Teknika 10150
Roadstar 10037, 10714, 10668,
Siam 10037 SuperTech 10556, 10037 TELE System 11585
11037, 10715
Siemens 10037, 10195 Supra 10178 Telecor 10037
Rolson 12001, 12098

14
Remote Control Codes

Television Television Television PVR


Telefunken 10037, 10625, 10714, Ultravox 10037 Wharfedale 10556, 10037, 11324, ReplayTV 20616
10560, 10698, 11585, UMC 11614, 11775 11667 Sonic Blue 20616
11667 White Westinghouse 10037
Unic Line 10037 TiVo 20739
Telefusion 10037 Wilson 10556
Uniden 12122
Telegazi 10037 Windsor 10668, 11037 TV/VCR Combination
United 10556, 10037, 10714,
Telemeister 10037 11037, 10715, 11652 Windy Sam 10556 Amstrad 10171
Telesonic 10037 Unitek 11709 Wintel 10714 Ferguson 10625
Telestar 10556, 10037 Universal 10037, 10714 World-of-Vision 12001 Fidelity 10171
Teletech 10037, 10668, 11037 Universum 10037, 10668, 10195, Wyse 11365 GoldStar 10037
Teleview 10037 11037, 10618, 10512 Xenius 10634 Grundig 10556, 10037, 10195
Tennessee 10037 Univox 10037 Xiahua 10698 LG 10178
Tensai 10037, 11037, 10715 V7 Videoseven 11666, 11755 XLogic 10698 Mitsubishi 10556
Tesla 10556, 10037, 10714, Vestel 10037, 10668, 11037, Xrypton 10037 Philips 10556, 10037
11037, 11652 11585, 11667
Yamaha 10650, 11576 Radiola 10556
Tevion 10556, 10037, 10714, Vexa 10037
Yamishi 10037 Saba 10625
10668, 11037, 11248, Victor 10650, 10653, 11428
11585, 11667 Yokan 10037 Sanyo 11974
Videocon 10037, 10508
Thomson 10037, 10625, 10560 Yoko 10037 Schneider 10556, 10037
VideoSystem 10037
Thorn 10037, 10499, 10512 YU-MA-TU 10037 Sharp 10818
Vidtech 10178
Thorn-Ferguson 10499 Zenith 10178, 10037, 11365, Siemens 10037
Viewsonic 11365, 11755, 12049 11423, 12358
TMK 10178 Sony 11505
Vision 10037 Zepto 11585
Tokai 10037, 10668, 11037 TEAC 10178, 10171
Vistron 11363 Zonda 10698
Tokaido 11037 Technics 10556
Vivax 11709
Topline 10668, 11037 Thomson 10625
Vizio 11758, 12209 VCR
Toshiba 10195, 11037, 10618,
Vortec 10037 DirecTV 20739 DVD
10650, 10508, 11169,
11508, 11524, 11652, Voxson 10178, 10037 Humax 20739 3D LAB 30539
12203 VU 11365, 12098 Panasonic 20616 Accurian 30675
Toyoda 11709 Walker 11667 Philips 20739 Acoustic Solutions 30713
TRANS-continents 10556, 10037, 10668, Waltham 10037, 10668, 11037 ReplayTV 20616 AEG 30675
11037 Wansa 12098 Sonic Blue 20616 AFK 31152
Transonic 10037, 10698, 10512, Wards 10178 TiVo 20739
11363 Aiwa 30533
Watson 10037, 10714, 10668, Akai 30675
Triad 10556 11037 PVR
Trio 11248 Alba 30539, 30713
Wega 10037 DirecTV 20739
Triumph 10556, 10037 Ambiance 33052
Welltech 10714, 11652 Humax 20739
TVTEXT 95 10556 Amstrad 30713
Weltstar 11037 Panasonic 20616
Uher 10037 Anthem 32820
Westinghouse 11755 Philips 20739

15
Remote Control Codes

DVD DVD DVD DVD


Aristona 30539, 30646 Elfunk 30713 Kennex 30713 Orion 30713
ASDA 32213 Elite 31152 Kenwood 30490, 30534 Ormond 30713
Audix 30713 Emerson 30675, 32213 Lenco 30713, 33052 Pacific 30713
Autovox 30713 EuroLine 30675 Lexicon 32545 Palladium 30713
Awa 32587 Ferguson 30713 LG 30741, 31602 Panasonic 30503, 30490, 31579,
Basic Line 30713 Finlux 30741 Limit 33052 31641, 32523, 32710,
32859
Bel Canto Design 31571 Firstline 30713 Lodos 30713
Pelican Accessories 30533
Black Diamond 30713 Foehn & Hirsch 33052 Loewe 30539, 30741, 32474,
32783 Philco 30675
Blue Parade 30571 Funai 30675
Logik 30713 Philips 30503, 30539, 30646,
Blue Sky 30713 GE 30522
30675, 30713, 31340,
Brandt 30503 GFM 30675 Lumatron 30741, 30713
31354, 32056, 32084,
Bush 30713 Global Sphere 31152 Lunatron 30741 32434, 32689
C-Tech 31152 Go Video 30741 Luxman 30573 Pioneer 30571, 30142, 30631,
California Audio Labs 30490 GoldStar 30741 Luxor 30713 31571, 32442, 32860
Cambridge Audio 32808 Goodmans 30713, 31152 Magnavox 30503, 30539, 30646, Polk Audio 30539
30675, 30713, 31354 Presidian 30675
Centrum 30675, 30713 GPX 30741
Manhattan 30713 ProAudio 31394
Changhong 30627 Grandin 30713
Marantz 30539, 32414, 32432, Proscan 30522
Cinetec 30713 Grundig 30539, 30713
33444
Clatronic 30675 H&B 30713 Proson 30713
Mark 30713
Clayton 30713 Haaz 31152 Pye 30539, 30646
Matsui 30713
Crown 30713 Hanseatic 30741 Radionette 30741
Maxim 30713
Dantax 30539, 30713 Harman/Kardon 30582, 31229, 33228 Radiotone 30713
MDS 30713
Denon 30490, 30634, 31634, Henss 30713 RCA 30522, 30571, 32213,
Medion 30630, 30741 32587
32258, 32748 Hitachi 30573, 30713, 31664
Memorex 32213 REC 30490
Dick Smith 31152 Hoeher 30713
Electronics Metz 30571, 30713 Red 32213
HotMedia 31152
Digihome 30713 Micromedia 30503, 30539 Redstar 31394
Humax 30646
DigiLogic 30713 Micromega 30539 Roadstar 30713
Inno Hit 30713
Digix Media 31394 Microsoft 30522, 32083 Rotel 30623
Insignia 30741, 30675, 32428,
Disney 30675 Minax 30713 Salora 30741
32596
DSE 30675, 31152 Mitsubishi 30713 Samsung 30490, 30573, 30199,
Integra 30503, 30571, 30627,
Dual 30713 31612, 31634, 32147 Momitsu 33052 30820, 31635, 32069,
NAD 30741 32329, 32489, 33195
Durabrand 30675, 30713 Irradio 30646
NEC 30741, 31602 Sanyo 30713
Dynex 32596 JVC 30503, 30539, 30623,
30867, 31597, 31602, Onkyo 30503, 30627, 31612, Schneider 30539, 30646, 30713
Dyon 33052
32855 32147, 30571, 31634 Schoentech 30713
eBench 31152
Kendo 30713 Oppo 30575, 32545 Scott 31394

16
Remote Control Codes

DVD DVD Blu-ray Disc DVD-R


SEG 30713 Toshiba 30503, 31639, 32277, JVC 32855 Irradio 30646
Semp 30503 32551, 32705, 33157 Lenco 33052 JVC 31597
Sharp 30630, 30675, 30713, Transonic 31394 Lexicon 32545 LG 30741
32250, 32474, 32652, TVE 30713 LG 30741, 31602 Loewe 30741
32869 United 30675, 30713, 31152 Limit 33052 Magnavox 30646, 30675
Sherwood 30741, 33052 Universum 30741, 30713 Loewe 32474, 32783 Medion 30741
Shinsonic 30533 Urban Concepts 30503 Magnavox 30675 Panasonic 30490, 31579, 32523,
Silva Schneider 30741 Vestel 30713 32710, 32859
Marantz 32414, 32432, 33444
SilverCrest 31152 Victor 31597 Philips 30646, 31340
Momitsu 33052
Skantic 30539, 30713 Vizio 32563 Pioneer 30631, 32860
Onkyo 32147, 32900, 32910,
SM Electronic 31152 Vtrek 32587 33100, 33101, 33500, Pye 30646
Smart 30713 Waltham 30713 33501 RCA 30522
Sony 30533, 30864, 31033, Wellington 30713 Oppo 32545 Samsung 30490, 31635
31070, 31431, 31516, Panasonic 31641, 32523, 32859
Weltstar 30713 Schneider 30646
31633, 32180
Wharfedale 30713 Philips 32084, 32434, 32689 Sharp 30630, 30675, 32869
Soundwave 30713
Windsor 30713 Pioneer 30142, 32442 Sony 31033, 31070, 31431,
Star Clusters 31152
Windy Sam 30573 Samsung 30199, 33195 31516, 31633, 32180
Strato 31152
Xbox 30522, 32083 Sharp 32250, 32474, 32652 Sylvania 30675
Strong 30713
XLogic 31152 Sherwood 33052 Targa 30741
Supervision 31152
Yamaha 30490, 30539, 30646, Sony 31516, 32180 Toshiba 31639, 32277, 32551
Sylvania 30630, 30675
30817, 31354, 32298, Sylvania 30675 Victor 31597
Symphonic 30675 32299 TASCAM 34004 Yamaha 30646
Tamashi 31394 Zenith 30503, 30741 Toshiba 32551, 32705, 33157 Zenith 30741
Tandberg 30713
Vizio 32563
Targa 30741 Blu-ray Disc HD-DVD
Yamaha 32298, 32299
Tchibo 30741 Ambiance 33052 Integra 32901, 33104, 33504
TCL 32587 Anthem 32820 DVD-R LG 30741
TCM 30741 Cambridge Audio 32808 Accurian 30675 Microsoft 32083
TEAC 34004, 30571, 30741, Denon 32258, 32748 Aristona 30646 Onkyo 32901, 33104 33504
30675, 31394 Dyon 33052 Denon 30490 Xbox 32083
Technica 30713 Foehn & Hirsch 33052 Emerson 30675
Technics 30490 Funai 30675 TV/DVD Combination
Funai 30675
Techwood 30713 Harman/Kardon 33228 Akai 11675
Go Video 30741
Teletech 30713 Insignia 30675, 32428, 32596 Black Diamond 11037, 30713
GPX 30741
Theta Digital 30571 Integra 32147, 32900, 32910, Blue Sky 11037, 30713
Hitachi 31664
Thomson 30522 33100, 33101, 33500, Bush 11037, 10698, 12719,
Humax 30646
33501 30713

17
Remote Control Codes

TV/DVD Combination TV/DVD Combination


Centrum 11037, 30713 Sunstech 12001
Crown 11037, 30713 Sylvania 10171, 11394, 11864,
DMTech 12001 11886, 30630, 30675
Dual 11037, 30713 TEAC 10698
Dynex 12049 Technica 11037, 30713
Elfunk 11037, 30713 Telefunken 10698
Emerson 11394, 11864, 11886, Teletech 11037, 30713
30675 Thomson 10625
Ferguson 11037, 30713 Toshiba 11524
Goodmans 11037, 30713 United 11037, 30713
Grandin 30713 Universum 30713
Grundig 30539 Vestel 11037
H&B 12001 Viewsonic 12049
Hanseatic 12001 Weltstar 11037, 30713
Hitachi 11037, 11667, 30713
Insignia 12049
JVC 12271
LG 11423
Logik 11037, 30713
Luxor 11037, 30713
Magnavox 12372
Matsui 11037, 30713
Medion 12719
Nordmende 12001
Odys 12719
Panasonic 12170
Philips 11454, 10556, 11394,
30539
Powerpoint 10698
Prosonic 12001
Pvision 12001
RCA 12746, 12932
Schaub Lorenz 12001
SEG 11037, 12719, 30713
Sharp 10818
Soniq 12493

18
Remote Control Codes

Memo

19
Y1212-1

SN 29401471CODE
(C) Copyright 2013 Onkyo Corporation Japan. All rights reserved.
* 2 9 4 0 1 4 7 1 C O D E *